MUSIC SYNTHESIZER

Reference Manual
Contents
Using the MODX Manuals..........................................2 Reference 25

Basic Structure 3 Display (touch panel) configuration ...................... 25

Performance Play (Home)....................................... 27
Functional Blocks ......................................................3 Motion Control......................................................... 33
Tone Generator Block................................................4 Mixing ....................................................................... 50
Tone Generator block ...................................................... 4
Scene........................................................................ 55
A/D Input Block ........................................................10 Play/Rec ................................................................... 60
Sequencer Block ......................................................10 Normal Part (AWM2) Edit........................................ 66
Arpeggio Block.........................................................11 Element Common Edit (Common) .................................66
Arpeggio categories....................................................... 11 Element Edit (Element) ................................................107
Sub categories............................................................... 11 Element All (All Element) .............................................130
Arpeggio Type Name..................................................... 12
Drum Part Edit ....................................................... 133
Arpeggio-related settings............................................... 13
Key Common Edit (Common) ......................................133
Arpeggio playback types................................................ 14
Key Edit (Key) ..............................................................140
Creating an Arpeggio..................................................... 16
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit ........................................ 145
Motion Sequencer Block .........................................17
Operator Common Edit (Common) ..............................145
Effect Block ..............................................................19 Operator Edit (Operator) ..............................................155
Effect structure............................................................... 19
Common/Audio Edit (Common/Audio)................ 159
Effect connection ........................................................... 20
Category Search.................................................... 176
About the Vocoder Effect............................................... 20
Performance Category Search.....................................176
Envelope Follower Block.........................................21
Arpeggio Category Search (Arp Category Search)......180
Controller Block .......................................................22 Waveform Category Search (Waveform Search).........182
Keyboard ....................................................................... 22 Rhythm Pattern ............................................................184
Pitch Bend wheel ........................................................... 22
Utility ...................................................................... 187
Modulation wheel........................................................... 22
Live Set................................................................... 212
Assignable Switches...................................................... 22
Live Set ........................................................................212
Knobs and Control Sliders ............................................. 22
Live Set Edit (Edit) .......................................................213
Super Knob.................................................................... 22
Live Set Register (Register) .........................................216
Internal Memory .......................................................23
Connecting an iPhone or iPad ............................. 217

EN
Using the MODX Manuals
Your MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 synthesizer comes with four different reference guides—the Owner’s Manual, the Reference
Manual (this document), the Synthesizer Parameter Manual, and the Data List. While the Owner’s Manual is packaged together
with the synthesizer as a hardcopy booklet, this Reference Manual, the Synthesizer Parameter Manual, and the Data List are
available for download from our web page as PDF documents.

Owner’s Manual (hardcopy booklet)

Describes how to set up your MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 and how to perform basic operations.
• This manual explains the following operations.
• Selecting Performances
• Playing the Keyboard
• Creating Your Own Live Sets
• Editing the Settings
• Recording and Playback
• Using as a Master Keyboard
• Connecting a Microphone or Audio Equipment
• Making Global System Settings
• Connecting External MIDI Instruments
• Using a Connected Computer
• Saving/Loading Data

Reference Manual (this PDF document)

Describes the internal design of your MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 and the various parameters that can be adjusted and set.

Synthesizer Parameter Manual (PDF document)

Explains the Part parameters, effect types, effect parameters, and MIDI messages that are used for synthesizers incorporating
the Yamaha AWM2 and FM-X tone generators. Read the Owner’s Manual and Reference Manual first and then use this
parameter manual, if necessary, to learn more about parameters and terms that relate to Yamaha synthesizers.

Data List (PDF document)

Provides lists such as the Waveform List, Performance List, Effect Type List, Arpeggio Type List, as well as reference materials
such as the MIDI Implementation Chart.

Using the Reference Manual Select the display name tab Select the function
• Using the display name tabs along the upper part of each page from the Reference Performance Edit

Normal Part (AWM2)

Search

Drum Part
Utility

Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Live Set

Reference section, you can jump to the page for parameter Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common

explanations of the corresponding display. A Normal Part (AWM2) (having pitched musical instrument sounds) can consist of up to eight Elements.
An Element is the basic, smallest unit for a Part. There are two types of Normal Part (AWM2) Edit displays:
Element Common Edit display, for editing settings common to all eight Elements; and Element Edit display,
Part Settings
General
for editing individual Elements. Pitch

• You can click on any page number from the Table of Contents or within
Zone Settings
Element Common Edit (Common) Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing

descriptive text to jump to the corresponding page. Part Settings Ins A

Ins B

General EQ

• You can also click on desired items and topics you want to refer to in the
Ins Assign
From the General display you can set various parameters such as Part Name, Volume, and Pan. Arpeggio
Common
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] Æ [EDIT] Æ Part selection Æ Element [Common] Æ [Part Settings] Æ
Operation
[General] Individual

“Bookmarks” index to the left of the main window, and jump to the Advanced
Motion Seq
Common

corresponding page. (Click the “Bookmarks” tab to open the index if it is Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO

not displayed.) Element

Control Assign
Receive SW

Osc / Tune

• If you want to find information on a specific topic, function or feature, Pitch EG

Filter
Type

select “Find” or “Search” from the Adobe Reader “Edit” menu and enter Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude

a key word to locate the related information anywhere in the document. Part Category Main (Part Main Category)
Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category)
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale

® ® Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Part. Element LFO

NOTE The most-recent version of Adobe Reader can be downloaded from the Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Part Name
Element EQ
All Element

Determines the Part name of the selected Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the Osc

following web page. parameter calls up the input character display.

Volume (Part Volume)

Balance

http://www.adobe.com/products/reader/ Determines the output level of the selected Part.

Settings: 0–127 Copy or Exchange
Elements
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.

NOTE The names and positions of menu items may vary according to the version Settings: L63–C–R63

of Adobe Reader being used.

MODX Reference Manual 66

Information
• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat
different from those on your instrument.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
• iPhone, iPad, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

MODX Reference Manual 2

 Basic Structure
Basic Structure Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Functional Blocks Arpeggio block
The MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 system consists of eight main functional blocks: Tone Generator, A/D Input, Motion Sequencer block
Sequencer, Motion Sequencer, Arpeggio, Controller, Effect, and Envelope Follower. Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Control Message Flow Controller block
Controller Block (page 22) Internal Memory
Motion Sequencer Block Audio Signal Flow
Keyboard
Controllers (page 17)
(such as Super Knob)
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Tone Generator (page 4) Motion Control
Effects (page 19)
AWM2 Tone Generator System Effects Mixing
FM-X Tone Generator 13 Insertion Effects
16 Parts Scene
Element EQ
Performances Part EQ Play/Rec
Master Effect Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Master EQ
Drum Part Edit
Sequencer Block Arpeggio Block Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
(page 10) (page 11) Common/Audio Edit
16-Track Arpeggio Playback x 8 Category Search
MIDI Sequencer Preset Arpeggio Envelope A/D Input
Songs User Arpeggio Follower Block (page 10) Utility
(page 21) Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection

MIDI OUT MIDI IN AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT

[USB TO HOST] [USB TO HOST] [USB TO HOST] [USB TO HOST]

MIDI [OUT] MIDI [IN] A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R]

Computer External MIDI equipment Computer Microphone, Computer Powered

audio equipment, speakers, etc.
etc.

AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2)

This instrument is equipped with an AWM2 tone generator block. AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2)
is a synthesis system based on sampled waves (sound material), and is used in many Yamaha
synthesizers. For extra realism, each AWM2 Voice uses multiple samples of a real instrument’s
waveform. Furthermore, a wide variety of parameters—envelope generator, filter, modulation, and
others—can be applied.

MODX Reference Manual 3

 Basic Structure
FM-X Functional blocks
This synthesizer also features an FM-X tone generator, in addition to the AWM2 block. The
Tone Generator block
abbreviation “FM” of FM-X stands for “frequency modulation,” which is a special tone generation
system that uses the frequency of one waveform to modulate another waveform, in order to produce a A/D Input block
completely new one. In this synthesizer, there are eight FM Operators and a full 88 different Algorithm Sequencer block
types. By changing the operator combination patterns, controlling the modulation with other
Arpeggio block
parameters such as levels and envelopes, and using high-quality filters, effects, and EQ commonly
with AWM2, you can create richly textured sounds that change in a highly complex fashion. Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Tone Generator Block
The tone generator block is what actually produces sound in response to the MIDI messages received
Reference
from the Sequencer block, Controller block, Arpeggio block and from the external MIDI instrument. The
MIDI messages are assigned to sixteen independent channels, and the instrument is capable of Display (touch panel) config.
simultaneously playing sixteen separate Parts, via the sixteen MIDI channels. However, the sixteen- Performance Play (Home)
channel limit can be overcome by using separate MIDI “ports,” each supporting sixteen channels. The
Motion Control
tone generator block of this instrument can handle MIDI messages over Port 1.
Mixing
Scene
Tone Generator block Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Performances Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
A Performance is a single set of sounds consisting of multiple Parts. You can change sounds as desired by
Common/Audio Edit
selecting the appropriate Performance. Each Performance has two types of parameters; parameters
unique to each Part and parameters common to all Parts. You can edit the entire Performance in the Category Search
Common/Audio Edit display (page 159). Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Part structure of a Performance
A Performance consists of 16 Parts and you can create Performances (in which multiple Parts or Parts are
combined—in a layer, or in other configurations) using the keyboard.

Parts
Internally, there are three Part types: Normal Parts (AWM2), Normal Parts (FM-X), and Drum Parts. Normal
Parts (AWM2) are mainly pitched musical instrument type sounds that can be played over the full range of
the keyboard. Normal Parts (FM-X) are also mainly pitched musical instrument type sounds, using FM
synthesis. Drum Parts are mainly percussion/drum sounds that are assigned to individual notes. A Normal
Part (AWM2) can consist of up to eight Elements, a Normal Part (FM-X) can consist of up to eight
Operators, and a Drum Part can consist of up to 73 Drum Keys.
An Element/Operator/Drum Key is the basic, smallest unit for a Part. By combining multiple Elements/
Operators/Keys, Parts can be created to produce even more realistic sounds or various richly textured
types of sound. Each Part is created by editing parameters unique to each (Element Edit parameters/
Operator Edit parameters/Key Edit parameters) and parameters common to all the Elements/Operators/
Keys (Element Common Edit, Operator Common Edit, and Key Common Edit parameters.)
NOTE For instructions on editing a Normal Part (AWM2), see page 66. For instructions on editing a Normal Part (FM-X),
see page 145. For instructions on editing a Drum Part, see page 133.

MODX Reference Manual 4

 Basic Structure
Normal Parts (AWM2), Normal Parts (FM-X), and Drum Parts
Functional blocks
Normal Parts (AWM2) Tone Generator block
These Parts are played conventionally from the A/D Input block
keyboard, with standard pitches sounding for each key, Element 2 Element 4 Element 6
Velocity Sequencer block
generated by AWM2. A Normal Part consists of up to
eight Elements. Depending on the settings in the Part Element 1 Element 3 Element 5 Arpeggio block
Edit, these Elements are sounded simultaneously, or Motion Sequencer block
different Elements are sounded according to the note
Effect block
range, velocity range and the XA (Expanded
Articulation) settings (page 6). Envelope Follower block
The illustration shows an example of a Normal Part (AWM2). Since the six Elements here are distributed Controller block
across both the note range of the keyboard and the velocity range, a different Element sounds depending Internal Memory
on which note you play and how strongly you play it. In the velocity distribution, Elements 1, 3 and 5 sound
when playing the keyboard softly, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 sound when playing it strongly. In the note
distribution, Elements 1 and 2 sound in the lower range of the keyboard, Elements 3 and 4 sound in the
Reference
middle range, and Elements 5 and 6 sound in the higher range. In the velocity distribution, Elements 1, 3
and 5 sound when playing the keyboard softly, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 sound when playing it strongly. In Display (touch panel) config.
a practical example of this in use, a piano Part could be composed of six different samples. Elements 1, 3 Performance Play (Home)
and 5 would be the sounds of the piano played softly, over the respective note ranges, while Elements 2, 4
Motion Control
and 6 would be strongly played sounds, for each respective note range. Actually, this instrument is even
more flexible than this, since it allows up to eight independent Elements. Mixing
Scene
Normal Parts (FM-X) Play/Rec
These Parts are also played conventionally from the keyboard, with standard pitches sounding for each
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
key, generated by FM synthesis. The sound for a Normal Part (FM-X) is created by modulating a frequency
of a fundamental waveform with another waveform. An operator that generates a fundamental waveform is Drum Part Edit
a “carrier,” and an operator that modulates these waveforms is a “modulator.” The combination of a Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
number of Operators is called “Algorithm.” Common/Audio Edit
When the waveform output from the Operator is a simple sine wave, no harmonics are included other than
Category Search
the fundamental tone. However, you can create harmonics by modulating the waveform with other
Operators. How harmonics can be created depends on the Modulators’ output levels and the frequency Utility
rates of Carriers and Modulators. On the other hand, the basic pitch is determined by Carrier’s frequency, Live Set
and the output level is determined by the Carrier’s output level. The figure described below shows a basic iPhone/iPad connection
way to create FM sound by using an analog synthesizer.
Modulator output level
determines the Cutoff
Frequency of the Filter.
Modulator OP

Frequency ratio of the Modulation Modulator envelope determines

Modulator and the Carrier the Filter envelope.
determines the base waveform
including specific harmonics by
the Oscillator.

Carrier OP
Carrier output level
determines the volume
by using the amplifier.
Carrier frequency determines Carrier envelope determines
the pitch of the Oscillator. the amplifier envelope.

Although the figure described above shows waveforms which are generated by two operators, the MODX
has eight Operators. The combination of a number of Operators is called an “Algorithm” and this
synthesizer has parameters for setting the Algorithm.

Drum Parts
Drum Parts are mainly percussion/drum sounds
that are assigned to individual notes on the
keyboard (C0 to C6). Unlike Elements, a Drum
C0 C1 C6
key is equivalent to the corresponding note,
Individual drum
meaning that you cannot change its range. sounds
Drum or percussion sounds are assigned to (different for
each Drum Key. You can create various types of each key)
Drum Parts by changing the drum or percussion sound assigned to each key and edit the parameters
such as pitch and EG.

MODX Reference Manual 5

 Basic Structure
Expanded Articulation (XA)
Functional blocks

Expanded Articulation (XA) is a tone generation system that provides greater performance flexibility and Tone Generator block
acoustic realism. This feature allows you to more effectively recreate realistic sound and natural A/D Input block
performance techniques—such as legato and staccato—and provides other unique modes for random Sequencer block
and alternate sound changes as you play.
Arpeggio block
Realistic legato performance Motion Sequencer block
This instrument more accurately reproduces a legato effect by allowing specific Elements to be sounded Effect block
when playing legato and other Elements to be played normally (with the XA Control parameter settings
Envelope Follower block
“Normal” and “Legato”).
Controller block
Authentic note release sound Internal Memory
The MODX reproduces these special, characteristic sounds by setting the XA Control parameter of certain
Elements to “Key Off.”
Reference
Subtle sound variations for each note played
Display (touch panel) config.
The MODX more accurately reproduces these subtle sound variations by using the XA Control parameter
settings “Cycle” and “Random.” Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Switching among different sounds to recreate the natural performance on an Mixing
acoustic instrument Scene
Acoustic instruments have their own unique characteristics—even specific, unique sounds that are
produced only at certain times in a performance. These include the flutter tonguing on a flute or the Play/Rec
playing of high harmonics on an acoustic guitar. The MODX recreates these by allowing you to switch Normal Part (AWM) Edit
between the sounds while you play—using the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] buttons and the XA Control Drum Part Edit
parameter settings, “A.SW1 On,” “A.SW2 On” and “A.SW Off.”
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
NOTE You can turn the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button on or off also by transmitting the Control Change number
specified in the Common/Audio Edit display ([Control]  [Control Number]) (page 167) from an external device. Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
New sounds and new styles of playing Utility
The highly versatile functions above can be applied effectively not only to acoustic sounds but also to
Live Set
synthesizer and electronic Parts as well. The XA feature opens up enormous potential for realizing
authentic sounds, performing expressively and coming up with creative new styles of playing. iPhone/iPad connection

Motion Control System

The Motion Control System is a completely new feature for variably controlling Motions (rhythmical,
multidimensional sound changes) in real time. This amazingly powerful feature dramatically and
dynamically alters the sounds of the instrument in new, never-heard-before ways—changing texturally,
rhythmically with the beats, providing cool, colorful lighting effects, and responding expressively to your
creative passion. The Motion Control System has three main functions:

Super Knob:
For creating multi-dimensional sonic changes, and enhancing those changes with colorful, continually
shifting lighting changes. Multiple parameters can be controlled simultaneously.

Motion Sequencer:
For continually variable sound changes. The powerful Motion Sequencer feature lets you dynamically
change sounds by operating Parameters depending on sequences created in advance. It provides real
time control for changing sounds depending on various sequences such as Tempo, Arpeggio, or the
rhythm of external connected devices.

Envelope Follower:
Envelope Follower is a function for detecting the volume envelope of the input signal waveform and
modifying sounds dynamically.
NOTE Envelope Follower can be controlled not only by the audio signal from an external device, but also by the output
of all Parts.

MODX Reference Manual 6

 Basic Structure
Motion Control System Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
• Continuous control of A/D Input block
Motion changes
Sequencer block
• Switch between Motions
Arpeggio block
• Trigger, Hold Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Control the Motion
Sequencer in real time Envelope Follower block
Controller block
AUDIO • Part 1–16 BEAT • Audio Beat Sync
• A/D Input Part • External MIDI Internal Memory
• Internal Tempo

Reference
Envelope Follower Motion Sequencer Super Knob
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Rhythmic change Automation
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection

Multi-dimensional
sonic change

Tone generator
Effect

For details on the Motion Control, refer to the website below:

http://www.yamaha.com/modx/

MODX Reference Manual 7

 Basic Structure
Elements, Drum Keys and Operators
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
Elements/Drum Keys/Operators are the smallest “building blocks” in the MODX that comprise a Part.
These small sound units can be built, enhanced and processed by a variety of traditional synthesizer A/D Input block
parameters, such as Pitch EG, Filter EG, Amplitude EG, and LFO (shown below). Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
LFO Motion Sequencer block
Low Frequency Oscillator
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
OSC (Oscillator)
FILTER AMP
Waveform (AWM2) Changes the tonal Controls the output
quality of the level (amplitude) of Reference
sound. the sound.
PITCH Display (touch panel) config.
Controls the pitch of
the sound. Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Pitch EG Filter EG Amplitude EG
(Pitch Envelope (Filter Envelope (Amplitude Envelope Scene
Generator) Generator) Generator)
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Oscillator Drum Part Edit
This unit allows you to assign the waveform (or basic sound material) to each Element/Operator/Key.
Oscillator-related parameters can be set as follows. Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
• For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Osc/Tune] (page 107, page 140) Category Search
Utility
• For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT]  Part selection  Operator selection  [Form/Freq] (page 155) Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Pitch
This unit allows you to control how the pitch changes over time. Pitch-related parameters can be set as
follows.
• For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Osc/Tune] (page 107, page 140)
• For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT]  Part selection  Operator [Common]  [Pitch/Filter] (page 148)

Parameters related to Pitch EG can be set as follows.

• For Normal Parts (AWM2)
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Pitch EG] (page 111)
• For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT]  Part selection  Operator [Common]  [Pitch/Filter] (page 148)

Filter
This unit modifies the tone of the sound by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the sound.
Also, by setting the FEG (Filter Envelope Generator), you can control how the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter
changes over time. Parameters related to Filter and Filter EG can be set as follows.
• For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Filter] (page 113, page 142)
• For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT]  Part selection  Operator [Common]  [Pitch/Filter] (page 148)

MODX Reference Manual 8

Amplitude Basic Structure
This unit controls the output level (amplitude) of the Element/Drum Key/Operator. Functional blocks
Parameters related to Amplitude and Amplitude EG can be set as follows.
Tone Generator block
• For Normal Parts (AWM2)
A/D Input block
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Amplitude] (page 121)
Sequencer block
• For Drum Parts
Arpeggio block
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Level/Pan] (page 143)
Motion Sequencer block
• For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT]  Part selection  Operator selection  [Level] (page 157) Effect block
Envelope Follower block
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) Controller block
As its name suggests, the LFO produces a wave of a low frequency.
These waves can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude of each Element/Operator to create effects Internal Memory
such as vibrato, wah and tremolo. There are two LFO types: Part LFO, which is common to all Elements/
Operators, and Element LFO, which is unique for each Element.
Parameters related to Part LFO can be set as follows. Reference
• For Normal Parts (AWM2) Display (touch panel) config.
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Mod/Control]  [Part LFO] (page 96) Performance Play (Home)

• For Normal Parts (FM-X) Motion Control

[EDIT]  Part selection  Operator [Common]  [Mod/Control]  [Part LFO] or [2nd LFO] (page 152) Mixing
Scene
Parameters related to Element LFO can be set as follows.
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Element LFO] (page 126) Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Maximum Polyphony Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Maximum polyphony refers to the highest number of notes that can be sounded simultaneously from Common/Audio Edit
the internal tone generator of the instrument. Category Search
The maximum polyphony of this synthesizer is 128 for AWM2 and 64 for FM-X. When the internal tone
Utility
generator block receives a number of notes exceeding the maximum polyphony, previously played
notes are cut off. Keep in mind that this may be especially noticeable with Parts not having decay. Live Set
Furthermore, the maximum polyphony applies to the number of Elements/Drum Keys used, not the iPhone/iPad connection
number of Parts. When Normal Parts (AWM2) that include up to eight Elements are used, the
maximum number of simultaneous notes may be less than 128.

MODX Reference Manual 9

 Basic Structure
A/D Input Block
Functional blocks
This block handles the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Various parameters
such as volume, pan, and effect can be set for the audio signal and the sound is output together with other Tone Generator block
Parts. An Insertion Effect, the System Effects, the Master Effects, and the Master EQ can be applied to the A/D Input block
audio signal input via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Sequencer block
Parameters related to the A/D Input block can be set as follows.
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Mixing] (page 50) Arpeggio block
[EDIT]  Part [Common]  [Audio In]  [Mixing] (page 161) Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
The Effect which is applied to the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks can be set as
follows. Envelope Follower block
[EDIT]  Part [Common]  [Audio In]  [Routing] (page 162) Controller block
Internal Memory
The gain of the audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks can be adjusted via the A/D INPUT
[GAIN] knob on the panel. Moreover, the on/off setting of the audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/
[R] jacks can be turned on/off via the A/D INPUT [ON/OFF] button. Reference
[UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Audio I/O]  “A/D Input” (page 190)
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Sequencer Block Scene

This lets you create Songs by recording and editing your performances as MIDI data (from the controller Play/Rec
block or an external device), allowing you to play the data back with the tone generator block. Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Songs Common/Audio Edit

A Song is created by recording your keyboard performance as MIDI sequence data to individual Tracks. Category Search
The MODX can store up to 128 Songs. Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Tracks
This is a memory location on the sequencer where your musical performances are stored. One Part can be
recorded to one track. Since the MODX has 16 tracks for one Song, you can record and play back a 16-
Part performance.

MIDI recording
You can record your keyboard performance to the Song. You can record knob operations, controller
operations and Arpeggio playback as well as your keyboard playing to the specified Track as MIDI events.
Your keyboard performance and controller/knob operations will be recorded to the Track when the
corresponding Keyboard Control Switch for the Part is turned ON.
NOTE The Control Change messages and Parameter Change messages can be recorded by operating the Knobs. For
details on Control Change messages, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
NOTE For detailed instruction, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

MODX Reference Manual 10

 Basic Structure
Arpeggio Block
Functional blocks
This block lets you automatically trigger musical and rhythmic phrases by simply pressing a note or notes
on the keyboard. Yamaha’s Arpeggio sequence also changes in response to the actual notes or chords Tone Generator block
you play, giving you a wide variety of inspiring musical phrases and ideas—both in composing and A/D Input block
performing.
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Arpeggio categories Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
The Arpeggio types are divided into 18 categories (including “No Assign” and “Control/Hybrid Seq”) as
listed below. The categories are based on instrument type. Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Arpeggio Type Category List
Internal Memory
Piano Piano Pad Pad/Choir
Keys Keyboard SynCp Syn Comp
Organ Organ CPerc Chromatic Perc Reference
Gtr Guitar Dr/Pc Drum/Perc Display (touch panel) config.
Bass Bass S.FX Sound FX Performance Play (Home)
Str String M.FX Musical FX Motion Control
Brass Brass Ethnc Ethnic Mixing
WW Woodwind --- No Assign Scene
SynLd Syn Lead Ct/Hb Control / Hybrid Seq Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Sub categories
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
The Arpeggio categories are divided into the sub categories listed below. Because the sub categories are Common/Audio Edit
listed based on the music genre, it is easy to find the sub category appropriate for your desired music Category Search
style.
Utility
Arpeggio Type Sub Category List Live Set
Rock Rock World World iPhone/iPad connection
Pop Rock Pop Rock General General
Ballad Ballad No Assign No Assign
Chill Chillout / Ambient Filter Filter *
Hip Hop Hip Hop Exprs Expression *
Funk Funk Pan Pan *
Modern R&B Modern R&B Mod Modulation *
Classic R&B Classic R&B PBend Pitch Bend *
House House / Dance Pop Assign Assign 1/2 *
Techno Techno / Trance Comb Comb *
Jazz Jazz / Swing Zone Zone Velocity *
D&B D&B / Breakbeats Z.Pad Zone Vel for Pad *
Latin Latin

NOTE In the Category Search display, the Sub Categories marked with an asterisk (*) are displayed only when
“Control/Hybrid Seq” is selected as the Category type.

MODX Reference Manual 11

Arpeggio Type Name Basic Structure
Functional blocks
The Arpeggio Types are named according to certain rules and abbreviations. Once you understand these
Tone Generator block
rules and abbreviations, you’ll find it easy to browse through and select the desired Arpeggio Types.
A/D Input block
Arpeggio types with “_N” at the end of the type name (example: HipHop1_N) Sequencer block
These Arpeggios are for using with the Normal Part, and Arpeggios with complex notes can be created Arpeggio block
even when triggered by one note (page 14).
Motion Sequencer block
Arpeggio types with “_C” at the end of the type name (example: Rock1_C) Effect block
These Arpeggios are for using with the Normal Part, and correct Arpeggios can be created corresponding Envelope Follower block
to the chord you play (page 14).
Controller block
Arpeggio types with a normal name (example: UpOct1) Internal Memory
In addition to the above types, there are three playback types: the Arpeggios created for use of Normal
Parts and played back using only the played notes and their octave notes (page 14), the Arpeggios
created for use of Drum Parts (page 15), and Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events (page 15). Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Arpeggio types with “_AF1”, “_AF2”, or “_AF1&2” at the end of the type name
Performance Play (Home)
(example: Electro Pop AF1)
Motion Control
When these Arpeggios are played, both of [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are automatically turned
ON and the phrase starts playback. Mixing
Scene
Arpeggio types with [Mg] at the beginning of the type name (example: Play/Rec
[Mg]HardRock1) Normal Part (AWM) Edit
These Arpeggios are for using with a Mega Voice.
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Mega Voices and Mega Voice Arpeggios
Category Search
Normal sound uses velocity switching to make the sound quality and/or level of a Part change
according to how strongly or softly you play the keyboard—giving greater authenticity and natural Utility
response to these Parts. However Mega Voices have a very complex structure with many different Live Set
layers that are not suitable for playing manually. Mega Voices were developed specifically to be iPhone/iPad connection
played by Mega Voice Arpeggios to produce incredibly realistic results. You should always use Mega
Voices with Mega Voice Arpeggios.

The Arpeggio Type List in the Data List PDF document contains the following columns.

Main Sub ARP ARP Name Time Original Random

Category Category No. Signature Length Tempo Accent SFX Sound Type

ApKb Rock 1 MA_70s Rock _ES 4/4 2 130 Acoustic Piano

ApKb Rock 2 MB_70s Rock _ES 4/4 1 130 :
ApKb Rock 3 MC_70s Rock 4/4 2 130
ApKb Rock 4 MD_70s Rock 4/4 4 130
ApKb Rock 5 FA_70s Rock 4/4 1 130
ApKb Rock 6 FB_70s Rock _ES 4/4 1 130
ApKb Rock 7 FC_70s Rock _ES 4/4 2 130

NOTE Note that this list is for illustration purposes only. For a complete listing of the Arpeggio Types, see the Data List
PDF document.

1 Main Category
Indicates an Arpeggio Main Category.

2 Sub Category
Indicates an Arpeggio Sub Category.

3 ARP No (Arpeggio Number)

Indicates the Arpeggio type number.

4 ARP Name (Arpeggio Name)

Indicates the Arpeggio Name.

MODX Reference Manual 12

5 Time Signature Basic Structure
Indicates the time signature or meter of the Arpeggio type. Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
6 Length
*1 A/D Input block
Indicates the data length (amount of measures) of the Arpeggio type. When the Loop parameter is
set to “off,” the Arpeggio plays back for this length and stops. Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
7 Original Tempo
Motion Sequencer block
Indicates the appropriate tempo value of the Arpeggio type. Note that this tempo is not set
automatically when selecting an Arpeggio type. Effect block
Envelope Follower block
8 Accent
Controller block
The circle indicates that the Arpeggio uses the Accent Phrase feature (page 14).
Internal Memory
9 Random SFX
The circle indicates that the Arpeggio uses the SFX feature (page 14).
Reference
) Sound Type Display (touch panel) config.
Indicates the sound type appropriate for the Arpeggio Type. Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
*1 The Loop parameter is set as follows.
Mixing
[EDIT]  Part Selection  Element/Operator [Common]  [Arpeggio]  [Common] (page 82)
Scene
Play/Rec
Arpeggio-related settings Normal Part (AWM) Edit
There are several methods for triggering and stopping the Arpeggio playback. In addition, you can set Drum Part Edit
whether or not SFX sounds and special Accent Phrases are triggered along with the normal sequence Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
data. Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Turning Arpeggio playback on/off Utility
The following three settings are available for turning the Arpeggio playback on/off. Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
To play the Arpeggio only when the note is Set the “Hold” parameter to “Off” and the “Trigger
pressed: Mode” parameter to “Gate.”

To continue the Arpeggio even if the note is Set the “Hold” parameter to “On” and the “Trigger
released: Mode” parameter to “Gate.”

To toggle the Arpeggio playback on/off Set the “Trigger Mode” parameter to “Toggle.” The
whenever the note is pressed: “Hold” parameter can be set to either “On” or “Off.”

NOTE “Hold” is set as follows.

[EDIT]  Part Selection  Element/Operator [Common]  [Arpeggio]  [Common] (page 82)
NOTE When receiving a MIDI sustain message (control change #64) with both of “Arp Master” and “Arp Part” set to
“On,” you can obtain the same result by setting “Hold” to “On.”
NOTE “Trigger Mode” is set as follows.
[EDIT]  Part Selection  Element/Operator [Common]  [Arpeggio]  [Advanced] (page 87)

Using the Knobs to control Arpeggios

By pressing the Knob Function [TONE]/[EG/FX]/[EQ]/[ARP/MS] button and selecting “ARP/MS,” you can
use the Knobs 1–2 to control Arpeggio playback. Try this out and listen for the changes in the sound. For
details regarding the effect of the Knobs 1–2, see Quick Edit (page 37).

Arpeggio functions which can be controlled by Knob operations

Knob 1 Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4

MODX Reference Manual 13

 Basic Structure
Accent Phrases
Functional blocks

Accent Phrases are composed of sequence data included in some Arpeggio types, sounding only when Tone Generator block
you play notes at a velocity higher (stronger) than that specified in the Accent Velocity Threshold A/D Input block
parameter. Sequencer block
If it is hard to play at velocities necessary to trigger the Accent Phrase, set the “Vel Threshold” (Accent
Velocity Threshold) parameter to a lower value. Arpeggio block
NOTE “Vel Threshold” (Accent Velocity Threshold) parameter is set as follows. Motion Sequencer block
[EDIT]  Part Selection  Element/Operator [Common]  [Arpeggio]  [Advanced] (page 87)
Effect block
NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the Data List PDF
document. Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Random SFX
Some Arpeggio types feature a Random SFX function which will trigger special sounds (such as guitar fret Reference
noises) when the note is released. The following parameters affecting Random SFX are provided.
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
For turning the Random SFX on/off: Random SFX parameter
Motion Control
For setting the volume of the SFX sound: Velocity Offset (Random SFX Velocity Offset) Mixing
parameter
Scene
For determining whether or not the volume of Key On Ctrl (Random SFX Key on Control) parameter Play/Rec
the SFX sound is controlled by velocity: Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
NOTE “Random SFX,” “Velocity Offset,” and “Key On Ctrl” are set as follows.
[EDIT]  Part Selection  Element/Operator [Common]  [Arpeggio]  [Advanced] (page 87) Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
NOTE The Random SFX function is not available for the Arpeggio which stops when the note is released. Common/Audio Edit
NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use the Random SFX function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the Category Search
Data List PDF document.
Utility
Live Set
Arpeggio playback types iPhone/iPad connection

There are three main Arpeggio playback types as described below.

Arpeggios for Normal Parts

Arpeggio types (belonging to all categories except for Drum/Perc and a part of Control/HybridSeq)
created for use of Normal Parts have the following three playback types.

Playback of played notes only

The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note(s) and octave notes.

Playback of a programmed sequence according to the played notes

These Arpeggio types have the several sequences each of which is suited for a certain chord type. Even if
you press only one note, the Arpeggio is played back using the programmed sequence—meaning that
notes other than the ones you play may be sounded. Pressing another note triggers a transposed
sequence using the pressed note as the new root note. Adding notes to those already held changes the
sequence accordingly. Arpeggios with this playback type have “_N” at the end of the type name.

Playback of a programmed sequence according to the played chord

These Arpeggio types created for use with Normal Parts are played back to match the chord type
determined by detecting the notes you play on the keyboard. Arpeggios with this playback type have “_C”
at the end of the type name.

NOTE When the “Key Mode” parameter is set to “Sort” or “Sort+Drct,” the same sequence is played back no matter
what order you play the notes. When the “Key Mode” parameter is set to “Thru” or “Thru+Drct,” a different
sequence is played back depending on the order you play the notes.
NOTE Since these types are programmed for Normal Parts, using them with Drum Parts may not produce musically
appropriate results.

MODX Reference Manual 14

 Basic Structure
Arpeggios for Drum Parts
Functional blocks

Arpeggio types in Drum/Perc categories are programmed specifically for use with Drum Parts, giving you Tone Generator block
instant access to various rhythm patterns. Three different playback types are available. A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Playback of a drum pattern
Pressing any note(s) will trigger the same rhythm pattern. Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Playback of a drum pattern, plus additional played notes (assigned drum Effect block
instruments) Envelope Follower block
Pressing any note will trigger the same rhythm pattern. Adding notes to the one already held produces
additional sounds (assigned drum instruments) for the drum pattern. Controller block
Internal Memory
Playback only of the played notes (assigned drum instruments)
Playing a note or notes will trigger a rhythm pattern using only the notes played (assigned drum
instruments). Keep in mind that even if you play the same notes, the triggered rhythm pattern differs Reference
depending on the order of the notes played. This gives you access to different rhythm patterns using the Display (touch panel) config.
same instruments simply by changing the order in which you play the notes, when the “Key Mode”
parameter is set to “Thru” or “Thru+Drct.” Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
NOTE The three playback types above are not distinguished by category name or type name. You’ll have to actually
Mixing
play the types and hear the difference.
NOTE Since these types are programmed for Drum Parts, using them with Normal Parts may not produce musically Scene
appropriate results. Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Arpeggio types (in Control/HybridSeq main categories with Filter, Expression, Pan, Modulation, Pitch
Category Search
Bend, and Assign 1/2 sub categories) are programmed primarily with Control Change and Pitch Bend
data. They are used to change the tone or pitch of the sound, rather than play specific notes. Utility
In fact, some types contain no note data at all. When using a type of this category, set the “Key Mode” Live Set
parameter to “Direct,” “Sort+Drct,” or “Thru+Drct.” iPhone/iPad connection
NOTE Settings related to Key Mode are set as follows.
[EDIT]  Part Selection  Element/Operator [Common]  [Arpeggio]  [Common] (page 82)

Tips for Arpeggio playback

Arpeggios not only provide inspiration and full rhythmic passages over which you can perform, they
give you quality MIDI data you can use in creating Songs, or fully formed backing parts to be used in
your live performances. For instructions on using Arpeggio, see the Owner’s Manual.

MODX Reference Manual 15

Creating an Arpeggio Basic Structure
Functional blocks
In addition to using the preset Arpeggios, you can also create your own original Arpeggio data. First,
Tone Generator block
record a phrase to Song Tracks (up to a maximum of four). Then, convert the Song (or the MIDI sequence
data) to Arpeggio data from the Put Track to Arpeggio display. A/D Input block
Sequencer block
1 Record MIDI sequence data to a Song.
Arpeggio block

2 Convert the MIDI sequence data (recorded to the Song) to Arpeggio data. Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Song Arpeggio Controller block
Recording Track 1 Internal Memory
User Arpeggio 256
Track 2
Track 3
User Arpeggio 001 Reference
Recording Track 4
Track 1 Display (touch panel) config.
Track 5
Track 2 Performance Play (Home)
Track 6
Track 3
Track 7 Motion Control
Track 4
Recording Track 8 Mixing
Track 9 Scene
Track 10
Convert Play/Rec
Track 11 Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Recording Track 12 Drum Part Edit
Track 13 [SONG] (Play) button
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
or
Track 14
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Play/Rec]  [MIDI]  Common/Audio Edit
Track 15 Touch the Song Name  [User Arp] Category Search
Track 16
Utility
After the above procedure, select tracks from the Put Track to
Live Set
Arpeggio display (page 63) to convert the Song to your own
You can record MIDI sequence data for the Arpeggio. iPhone/iPad connection
Arpeggio to any of the Tracks. After recording,
select four Tracks from all sixteen and convert
them to Arpeggio data.

Determining how Song/Pattern data is converted to an Arpeggio – Convert Type

MIDI sequence data (of Song Tracks) can be converted to Arpeggio data in one of three ways, according
to the Convert types below. These types can also be selected independently for each destination Track—
providing enormous flexibility and performance control.

Normal (Normal Arpeggio) The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note and its octave notes.

Fixed Playing any note(s) will trigger the same MIDI sequence data.

OrgNotes (Original Notes) Basically same as “Fixed” with the exception that the Arpeggio playback notes
differ according to the played chord.

Record the MIDI sequence data to a Song Track, referring to the previous instructions in this chapter as
needed. The examples listed below are used as reference.

Creating a rhythm pattern (using a Drum Voice)

Track 1 Record a basic rhythm pattern using various drum instruments. Convert via “Fixed.”

Track 2–4 Record a different rhythm pattern using a specific drum instrument to Convert via “Normal.”
each Track.

Creating a bass line (using a Normal Voice)

Track 1 Record a bass line using a specific desired key Convert via “OrgNote” after the OrgNotes Root is
(root). set.

Track 2–4 off

MODX Reference Manual 16

 Basic Structure
Motion Sequencer Block
Functional blocks
The powerful Motion Sequencer feature lets you dynamically change sounds by operating Parameters
depending on sequences created in advance. Tone Generator block
It provides real time control for changing sounds depending on various sequences such as Tempo, A/D Input block
Arpeggio, or the rhythm of external connected devices.
Sequencer block
You can assign up to eight desired Sequence types for one Lane.
You can also set up to four Lanes corresponding to the Motion Sequencer function for one Part. Up to eight Arpeggio block
Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. Motion Sequencer block
The setting status (on or off) the Lanes in the entire Performance will be shown as follows.
Effect block
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Motion Control]  [Motion Seq] (page 44)
Envelope Follower block
Also, the parameters for each Lane are set as follows. Controller block
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element/Operator [Common]  [Motion Seq]  Internal Memory
[Lane] (page 91)

Lane setting Sequence Patterns for the Lane

Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection

Selected Sequence setting Lane setting

Turning the Motion Sequencer on/off

The following settings are available for turning the Motion Sequencer playback on/off.

To play the Motion Sequence when the note is Set the “LaneSW” parameter to “On,” the “Trigger”
pressed: parameter to “Off,” and the” Sync” parameter to “Off.”

To play the Motion Sequence when the Set the “LaneSW” parameter to “On,” the “Trigger”
[MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button is pressed: parameter to “On,” and the “Sync” parameter to “Off.”

NOTE “LaneSW” and “Trigger” are set as follows.

[EDIT]  Part selection  Element/Operator [Common]  [MOTION Seq]  [Lane] (page 91)

MODX Reference Manual 17

 Basic Structure
Using the Knobs to control Motion Sequencer
Functional blocks

By pressing the Knob Function [TONE]/[EG/FX]/[EQ]/[ARP/MS] button and selecting “ARP/MS,” you can Tone Generator block
use the Knobs 3–4 to control Motion Sequencer playback. Try this out and listen for the changes in the A/D Input block
sound. For details regarding the effect of the Knobs 3–4, see Quick Edit (page 37). Sequencer block
Motion Sequencer functions which can be controlled by Knob operations Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Knob 1 Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4

Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Editing Motion Sequences
Performance Play (Home)
You can create a custom Motion Sequence consisting of up to sixteen steps. For details about Editing, see Motion Control
page 93.
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Parameters related to Motion Sequencer
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
In this instrument, Motion Sequencer is considered as a virtual controller and can be selectable in the Drum Part Edit
“Source” parameter. The target parameter you want to control by Motion Sequencer is set in the
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
“Destination” parameter. For details, see page 100.
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection

MODX Reference Manual 18

 Basic Structure
Effect Block
Functional blocks
This block applies effects to the output of the tone generator block as well as audio input block,
processing and enhancing the sound. Effects are applied in the final stages of editing, letting you change Tone Generator block
the sound as desired. A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Effect structure Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
System Effects—Variation and Reverb Envelope Follower block
System Effects are applied to the overall sound. With System Effects, the sound of each Part is sent to the Controller block
effect according to the Effect Send Level for each Part. The processed sound (referred to as “wet”) is sent Internal Memory
back to the mixer according to the Return Level, and output—after being mixed with the unprocessed
“dry” sound. This instrument is equipped with Variation and Reverb as System Effects. In addition, you can
set the Send Level from Variation to Reverb. This parameter is used to apply Reverb to the signals output Reference
from the Variation. You can get a natural effect by applying Reverb depth to the Variation sound with the
same level as that of the dry sound. Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Insertion Effects Mixing
Scene
Insertion Effects can be applied individually to each of specified parts before merging signals of all parts.
It should be used for sounds for which you want to drastically change the character. You can set different Play/Rec
Effect types to the Insertion Effects A and B for each Part. These settings can be made from Part Edit  Normal Part (AWM) Edit
[Effect] (page 75, page 136, page 150). Drum Part Edit
This synthesizer features 13 sets of Insertion Effects. They can be applied to Parts1–8 and four of the Parts
9–16 and A/D Input Part. Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Master Effect Utility
Live Set
This block applies effects to the final stereo output signal of the entire sound. Multiple Effect types are
available. iPhone/iPad connection

Element EQ
Element EQ is applied to each Element of the Normal Part (AWM2) and each key of the Drum Part. You can
specify one of three different EQ shapes, including shelving and peaking.
NOTE Element EQ does not affect the Input signals from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

Part EQ
This EQ is applied to a Part before and after the Insertion Effect.

Part
3-band 2-band
Insertion Effect
parametric EQ parametric EQ
Part EQ Part EQ

Master EQ
Master EQ is applied to the final (post-effect), overall sound of the instrument. In this EQ, all five bands can
be set to peaking, with shelving being available also for the lowest and highest bands.

MODX Reference Manual 19

Effect connection Basic Structure
Functional blocks
1 Each EQ and Insertion Effect applied to each Performance
Tone Generator block
Part
Part EQ A/D Input block
Part
Insertion A/B
2 Variation and Reverb related parameters Sequencer block
Setting: Part Edit  [Effect]  [Routing] (page 75, page 136, Arpeggio block
page 150) Send Level
Motion Sequencer block
Common/Audio Edit  [Effect]  [Routing] (page 169)
Variation Effect block
3 Master Effect related parameters Reverb Envelope Follower block
Setting: Common/Audio Edit  [Effect]  [Master FX]
Variation Controller block
(page 172) to Reverb
Internal Memory
4 Master EQ related parameters
System Effect
Setting: Common/Audio Edit  [Effect]  [Master EQ]
(page 173) Return Level Reference
Master Display (touch panel) config.
NOTE Regarding the audio input signal from the A/D INPUT [L/
Effect Performance Play (Home)
MONO]/[R] jacks, the effect is set in Common/Audio Edit
 [Audio In]. Motion Control
Mixing
Master EQ
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
About the Vocoder Effect Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
MODX features a Vocoder effect. Vocoder is a distinctive, “robot voice” effect which extracts the
Category Search
characteristic of the microphone sound and adds it to the sound via your keyboard performance. The
human voice consists of sounds generated from the vocal cords, and filtered by the throat, nose and Utility
mouth. These resonant sections have specific frequency characteristics and they function effectively as a Live Set
filter, creating many formants (harmonic content). The Vocoder effect extracts the filter characteristics of iPhone/iPad connection
the voice from the microphone input and recreates the vocal formants by the use of multiple band pass
filters. The machine-like ‘robot’ voice is created by passing the pitched sounds of musical instruments
(such as a synthesizer sound) through the filters.

Extracting the characteristic

Mic Input or of the input sound
Part Output

Part Output Creating formants Robot-like

(Keyboard voice
Performance)
Vocoder

About Effect categories, Effect types, and Effect parameters

For information regarding the effect categories of this instrument and the effect types contained in
their categories, see the “Effect Type List” in the Data List PDF document. For information on the
effect parameters which can be set in the each effect type, see the “Effect Parameter List” in the Data
List PDF document. For information on the descriptions of each effect category, each effect type, and
each effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameters Manual PDF document.

About Preset settings

Preset settings for parameters of each effect type are provided as templates and can be selected in
the Effect Type selection display. To get a desired effect sound, try first selecting one of the Presets
close to your imagined sound, then change the parameters as necessary. Preset settings can be
determined by setting “Preset” in each effect parameter display. For information on each effect type,
see the Data List PDF document.

MODX Reference Manual 20

 Basic Structure
Envelope Follower Block
Functional blocks
Envelope Follower is a function for detecting the envelope of the input signal waveform and modifying
sounds dynamically. This function allows you to control not only Part outputs but also input signals from Tone Generator block
external devices connected to the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. A/D Input block
The Input source of each Envelope Follower is fixed such as Part 1 for EnvFollower 1, Part 2 for
Sequencer block
EnvFollower 2, and the Audio Part for EnvFollower AD. However, the signal output from each Envelope
Follower can be another “input source” for any desired destination such as each Part or even the entire Arpeggio block
Performance. For example, you can modify the sound of Part 2 by using the Envelope Follower for Part 1 Motion Sequencer block
(EnvFollower 1) as the “Source.” The Envelope Follower as the “Source” and the target parameter to be
Effect block
controlled by the Envelope Follower (which is called “Destination”) are set in the Control Assign display
(page 100). Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Each Envelope Follower

EnvFollower 1 EnvFollower 2 EnvFollower MST EnvFollower AD

Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Entire
Part 1 Part 2 Performance Audio Part
(sixteen Parts and
Mixing
Audio Part)
Scene
Each Input source for Envelope Follower Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Input signal to Envelope Follower (Fixed)
Drum Part Edit
Output signal from Envelope Follower (The Destination is flexible)
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Selected Envelope Follower Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection

Signal flow of Input sources for

Envelope Follower Envelope Follower

[EDIT]  Common/Audio Edit [Audio In]  [Routing]  “Envelope Follower” (EnvFollower AD)
[EDIT]  Common/Audio Edit  [Effect]  [Routing]  “Envelope Follower” (EnvFollower MST)
[EDIT]  Part selection  Element/Operator [Common]  [Effect]  [Routing]  “Envelope Follower”
(EnvFollower 1–16)

MODX Reference Manual 21

 Basic Structure
Controller Block
Functional blocks
This block consists of the keyboard, Pitch Bend and Modulation Wheels, Assignable Switches, Knobs,
Control Sliders and Super Knob. By operating these controllers, you can transmit MIDI messages to the Tone Generator block
tone generator block to play and modify sounds, or to the DAW software to further control the sounds. A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Keyboard Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
The keyboard transmits the note on/off messages to the Tone Generator Block (for sounding) and
Effect block
Sequencer Block (for recording). You can change the note range of the keyboard in octaves by using the
OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons, transpose the notes by using the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons while holding down the Envelope Follower block
[SHIFT] button, and set how the actual velocity is generated according to the strength with which you play Controller block
notes.
Internal Memory

Pitch Bend wheel

Reference
Use the Pitch Bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from Display (touch panel) config.
Pitch up
you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard.
Performance Play (Home)
Roll the wheel upward/downward to bend the pitch upward/downward.
This wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch Motion Control
when released. The Pitch Bend Range setting can be changed in Part Mixing
Edit  [Part Settings]  [Pitch] (page 68). Functions other than Pitch Scene
Pitch down
Bend can be assigned to the Pitch Bend wheel in the Part Edit 
Play/Rec
[Mod/Control]  [Control Assign] (page 100, page 153).
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Modulation wheel Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Even though the Modulation wheel is conventionally used to apply Common/Audio Edit
Maximum
vibrato to the sound, many of the preset Performances have other Category Search
functions and effects assigned to the wheel. Utility
The more you move this wheel up, the greater the effect that is applied
Live Set
to the sound. To avoid accidentally applying effects to the current
Performance, make sure the Modulation wheel is set to minimum iPhone/iPad connection
before you start playing. Various functions can be assigned to the Minimum
Modulation wheel in Part Edit  [Mod/Control]  [Control Assign]
(page 100, page 153).

Assignable Switches
According to the XA (Expanded Articulation) Control settings (page 6) in Element Edit  [Osc/Tune]
(page 107), you can call up specific Elements of the current Part by pressing each of these buttons during
your keyboard performance. You can select how the on/off status of these buttons is switched in Common/
Audio Edit  [General] (page 159). Furthermore, you can assign various functions (other than calling up
specific Elements) to these buttons in Part Edit  [Mod/Control]  [Control Assign] (page 100, page 153).

Knobs and Control Sliders

These knobs and sliders let you change various aspects of the Part’s sound in real time—while you play.
For instructions on using the knobs and control sliders, see the Owner’s Manual. For instructions on using
the Knobs 1–4 (5–8), see “Quick Edit” (page 35).

Super Knob
The Super Knob lets you simultaneously control the parameters common to all Parts (Assign 1–8) which
are assigned to the eight knobs. For instructions on using the Super Knob, see the Owner’s Manual. For
the editable setting values for the Super Knob, see the Super Knob display (page 45). Also, for instructions
on setting the Assign 1–8 controls, see the Control Assign display (page 166) for the Common/Audio Edit.

MODX Reference Manual 22

 Basic Structure
Internal Memory
Functional blocks
The MODX creates a variety of different kinds of data, including Performances, Live Sets, and Songs. This
section describes how to maintain the various types of data and use the memory devices/media for storing Tone Generator block
them. A/D Input block

Data communication Sequencer block

Internal Memory between this synthesizer Arpeggio block
and an external device
Motion Sequencer block
Recall Compare Preset Memory Internal data communication
Effect block
Buffer Buffer • Preset Performance
• Arpeggio Envelope Follower block
Excluding Excluding
• Motion Sequence
Master and Master and MIDI instrument or computer Controller block
• Audition Phrase
Utility settings Utility settings
• Waveform DAW software
Internal Memory
• Live Set
• Curve
• Micro Tuning
Reference
Bulk Dump Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Edit Buffer User Memory USB flash drive
using store button)
Store (executed by

Motion Control
• Performance Edit For User File extension “.X8A”
Mixing
• Motion Sequence Edit • User Performance
MOTIF XF format Scene
• User Arpeggio File extensions “.X3A,” “.X3V,”
• User Curve Edit • User Motion Sequence “.X3G,” and “.X3W” Play/Rec
• User Curve MOTIF XS format
• Live Set Edit
• User Live Set File extensions “.X0A,” “.X0V,” Normal Part (AWM) Edit
• User Micro Tuning Edit “.X0G,” and “.X0W”
• User Waveform Edit • User Micro Tuning Drum Part Edit
MOXF format
Load/Save

• User Waveform File extensions “.X6A,” “.X6V,”

“.X6G,” and “.X6W” Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
• Utility
• Quick Setup Common/Audio Edit
• Utility • User Audition Phrase File extension “.X8U”
MONTAGE format Category Search
• Quick Setup
File extension “.X7U”
Utility
For Library
File extensions “.X8L” Live Set
MONTAGE format
File extension “.X7L” iPhone/iPad connection
• Song Song
File extensions “.MID”

File extensions “.WAV”

Audio Record/Playback File extensions “.WAV” “.AIF”

Preset Memory
Preset Memory is memory designed specifically for reading out data such as Preset Performance,
Arpeggio, and Audition Phrase. You cannot overwrite the data in Preset Memory.

Edit buffer
The edit buffer is the memory location for edited data of these types: Performance, Live Set, and Song.
Although the edit buffer is designed specifically for data writing and data reading, the data contained in
the edit buffer is lost when the power is turned off. You should always store edited data to User memory
before editing new performance or before turning off the power. Data other than Performance and Motion
Sequence are automatically stored.

User memory
User data edited in the Edit buffer and utility settings for the entire system are stored in the dedicated area
in the User memory. Up to eight Library files (.X8L) read from the USB flash drive are loaded in the
dedicated area in the User memory.
This is read-write memory and the data will be kept even after the power is turned off.

MODX Reference Manual 23

Recall buffer and Compare buffer Basic Structure
If you’ve selected another Performance without storing the one you were editing, you can recall your Functional blocks
original edits, since the edit buffer’s contents are stored on backup memory, called the Recall buffer. Also,
the instrument has a Compare buffer in which the sound settings prior to editing will temporarily be Tone Generator block
reinstated for comparison purposes. You can switch between the just-edited sound and its unedited A/D Input block
condition, and hear how your edits affect the sound. Both of these are read-write memory types. However, Sequencer block
you should make sure to store the sequence data before turning off the power, because any sequence
data you’ve created will be lost when the power is turned off. For instructions on using the Compare Arpeggio block
function, see the Owner’s Manual. Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory

Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection

MODX Reference Manual 24

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Display (touch panel)

Reference

Display (touch panel) configuration

This section explains the navigation bar which is common to all types of displays.

Navigation bar
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 HOME icon
Moves to the Performance Play display (page 27).

2 EXIT icon
Functions same as the [EXIT] button on the panel. Press this icon to exit from the current display and
return to the previous level in the hierarchy.

3 [INFORMATION] area
Displays helpful information, including the currently selected display name.

4 EFFECT icon
Touch the icon to call up the Effect Switch display (page 209). The icon turns off when any of the Effect
blocks (Insertion, System or Master) is off.

5 QUICK SETUP icon

Displays the settings of Local Control ON/OFF and MIDI IN/OUT.
The keyboard-shaped icon lights up when Local Control is set to ON and turns off when Local Control
is set to OFF.
When MIDI is set as the MIDI IN/OUT setting, a MIDI connector-shaped icon appears. When USB is set
as the MIDI IN/OUT setting, a USB connector-shaped icon appears. Touch the desired icon to call up
the corresponding Quick Setup display (page 188).

6 TEMPO SETTINGS icon

Displays the tempo of the currently selected Performance. Touch the icon to call up the Tempo Settings
display (page 207).

7 LIVE SET icon

Touch the icon to call up the Live Set display (page 212).

8 UTILITY icon
Touch the icon to call up the last opened display among the Utility displays.

MODX Reference Manual 25

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Display (touch panel)

9

Scroll buttons Display All button Display All

9 Pop-up List
Displays setting values for parameters. When the setting values are displayed in multiple pages, you
will need to use the Scroll buttons to scroll through the pages or the Display All button to display all of
the setting values.

MODX Reference Manual 26

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Performance
Performance Play (Home)
Home
From the Performance Play display you can play a selected Performance and edit some of the
Motion Control
Performance-related settings.
Overview

Home Quick Edit

Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Press the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button
Operation or Super Knob
Touch the [HOME] icon
Knob Auto
Mixing
^ 1 2
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI

3 Audio

5 6

7 8 9

#$ %

1 Performance name
Indicates the currently selected Performance name. Touching the parameter calls up the menu for
Category Search, Edit, and Recall.
NOTE Once you edit any parameter in the selected Performance, a blue flag icon appears at right in the
Performance Name.

2 Part indicator
When the cursor is on the Performance name or on Parts 1–8, this indicates whether Parts 9–16 are
used or not.
When the cursor is on Parts 9–16, it indicates whether Parts 1–8 are used or not. If Parts 9–16 are not in
use, this indicator is not shown.

3 Flag
Indicates the tone generation attributes of the currently selected Performance. (See chart below.)

Flag Definition
AWM2 Performance comprised only of AWM2 Parts
FM-X Performance comprised only of FM-X Parts
AWM2+FM-X Performance comprised of both AWM2 and FM-X Parts
MC Performance featuring Motion Control
SSS Performance featuring Seamless Sound Switching

4 Knob functions
Indicates the functions currently assigned to the Knobs 1–4 (5–8).

MODX Reference Manual 27

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

5 Type/Name Switch Performance

Switches between the displays of Part Type/Category and Part Name. Home
Settings: Type, Name
Motion Control
6 Part Types / Part Names Overview
Indicates the Part types and categories or the Part names. Quick Edit
Touching the parameter calls up the menu for Category Search, Edit, and Copy.
Arpeggio
To add another Part, touch the “+” icon.
Motion Seq
7 Common Motion Sequencer switch Super Knob
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer of the Common/AD Parts is on or off. When all Lane Knob Auto
switches of the Common/AD Parts are off, this switch is not shown.
Settings: Off, On
Mixing
Scene
8 Part Arpeggio On/Off switch Play / Rec
Determines whether the Arpeggio of each Part is on or off. When the Arpeggio and the Arpeggio Hold
MIDI
are set to on, “Arp Hold On” is displayed.
NOTE You can turn the Arpeggio Hold for the Part on or off by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and Audio
touching this switch.
Settings: Off, On

9 Part Motion Sequencer switch

Determines whether the Motion Sequencer of each Part is on or off. When all Lane switches of the Part
are off, this switch is not shown.
Settings: Off, On

) Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Part’s note range. For example, setting a Note Limit of
“C5–C4” lets you hear the Part by playing notes in the two ranges of C-2 to C4 and C5 to G8; notes
played between C4 and C5 have no sound. For details about the Note Limit setting, see the Owner’s
Manual.
Settings: C -2 – G8

! Keyboard Control switch

Determines whether the Keyboard Control for each Part is on or off. When this switch is set to off, the
Part will not sound even you play the keyboard (unless the Part is selected).
Settings: Off, On

@ Switching Mute on/off for Parts

Determines whether the Mute for each Part is on or off.
Settings: Off, On

# Switching Solo on/off for Parts

Determines whether the Solo for each Part is on or off.
Settings: Off, On

$ Volume of Parts
Determines the Volume for the Part.
Settings: 0–127
NOTE When the triangle marks for the Volume are shown in blue, the volume change created by the control sliders
is not reflected to the overall sound. When the value changed by the control slider reaches the value shown
as a blue triangle, the triangle mark changes to white, and the volume change created by the control sliders
are reflected to the overall sound.

% Meter
Indicates the audio output level of the Part.

MODX Reference Manual 28

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

^ View Performance
Determines whether the detailed information of each Part is displayed (On) or not displayed (Off). The Home
displayed information differs depending on the cursor position or the Control function settings.
Settings: Off, On
Motion Control
NOTE When the cursor is on the Performance name on the Performance Play (Home) display, you can also switch Overview
the information views by pressing the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button. Quick Edit

This section explains when “View” is turned on. Arpeggio

Motion Seq
Super Knob
 Element view Knob Auto
This appears only when the currently selected Part is the Normal Part (AWM2), and Motion Control 
Mixing
Overview  Slider Function [Elem/Op Control] button is ON.
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Element Level Element Switch

Element SW (Element switch)

Determines whether each Element is active or not.
Settings: Off, On

Element Level
Determines the output level of the Element.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 29

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 Drum Key view Performance

This appears only when the currently selected Part is the Drum Part, and Motion Control  Overview  Home
Slider Function [Elem/Op Control] button is ON.
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Drum Key Level

Drum Key Level

Determines the output level of the Drum Key.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 30

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 Algorithm view Performance

This appears only when the currently selected Part is the Normal Part (FM-X), and Motion Control  Home
Overview  Slider Function [Elem/Op Control] button is ON.
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Operator Level

Algorithm (Algorithm Number)

Changes Algorithms.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
NOTE Tapping the Algorithm image calls up the Algorithm Search display.

Feedback (Feedback Level)

Waveforms can be changed by feeding some of the signal generated by an operator back through that
operator. This allows you to set the feedback level.
Settings: 0–7

Operator Level
Determines the output level of the Operator.
Settings: 0–99

MODX Reference Manual 31

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 Part – Note view Performance

This appears only when the [PART CONTROL] button is turned on or the cursor is on the Note Limit. This is Home
useful for checking the Layer/Split settings among Parts.
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Note Limit

 Velocity – Note view

This appears only when the cursor is on any velocity limit of Parts. This is useful for setting Velocity split
among Parts.

Velocity Limit

MODX Reference Manual 32

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Performance
Motion Control
Home
From the Motion Control display you can edit all Motion Control settings, such as general sound settings,
Motion Control
Arpeggio, and the Motion Sequencer of the currently selected Performance.
The Motion Control section contains the following various displays. Overview
• Overview Quick Edit
• Quick Edit Arpeggio
• Arpeggio Motion Seq
• Motion Sequencer Super Knob
• Super Knob
Knob Auto
• Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
Motion Control MIDI
Audio

Overview
The Overview display indicates the illustration of the connection between Controllers and Parts. You can
confirm the current settings here.
NOTE Lines between the most recently used controller and Part are shown in bold.

[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Motion Control]  [Overview]

Operation or
[SHIFT] + [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]

Part
Indicates the currently selected Part. To confirm a Part’s connections, select the Part here.
Settings: Common, Part 1–16

Edit Common Control Settings/Edit Part Control Settings

Calls up the Control Assign display for the selected Part. For “Common,” see page 166. For Part 1–16, see
page 100.

Slider Function
Switches among Performance Control, Part Control, and Element/Operator Control.
Settings: Part Control, Elem/Op Control
NOTE You can store Slider function operations as Performance data.

MODX Reference Manual 33

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Controller Performance
Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Controller” and Part is shown. Home
The “Controller” here refers to:
Motion Control
• Pitch Bend wheel
• Modulation wheel Overview
• [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons (Assignable switches 1 and 2) Quick Edit
• [MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion sequencer Hold) button Arpeggio
• [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion sequencer trigger) button Motion Seq
Settings: Off, On Super Knob

Assignable Knob Auto

Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Assignable” and Part is shown. Mixing
The “Assignable” here refers to: Scene
• Assignable Knobs 1–4 (5–8) Play / Rec
Settings: Off, On
MIDI
Fader Audio
Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Fader” and Part is shown.
The “Fader” here refers to:
• Control sliders 1–4 (5–8 / 9–12 / 13–16)
Settings: Off, On

Super Knob
Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Super Knob” and Part is shown.
The “Super Knob” here refers to:
• Super Knob
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 34

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Performance
Quick Edit
Home
From the Quick Edit display you can make general sound settings. You can select whether the settings are Motion Control
commonly applied to all Parts or to only one selected Part.
Overview

Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Motion Control]  [Quick Edit] Quick Edit

Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Part
Indicates the currently selected Part. Select the Part you want to use Quick Edit with here.
Settings: Common, Part 1–16

 When “Part” is set to “Common”

You can edit the parameters commonly applied to all Parts.

Performance Name
Enters the desired name for the Performance. Performance names can contain up to 20 characters.
Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.

FEG Atk (FEG Attack Time)

Determines the speed of filter variation from the time a note is played until the maximum initial level of
the Cutoff Frequency is reached. This parameter determines the offset value of the FEG (page 118) for
the Element/Operator Common.
Settings: -64 – +63

FEG Decay (FEG Decay Time)

Determines how fast the Cutoff Frequency falls from maximum attack level to the sustain level. This
parameter determines the offset value of the FEG parameter (page 118) for the Element/Operator
Common.
Settings: -64 – +63

FEG Rel (FEG Release Time)

Determines how fast the Cutoff Frequency falls from the sustain level to zero when a note is released.
This parameter determines the offset value for the FEG parameter (page 118) of the Element/Operator
Common.
Settings: -64 – +63

Edit Master EQ
Calls up the Master EQ display (page 173) for Common/Audio Edit.

MODX Reference Manual 35

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Edit All Arp (Edit All Arpeggio) Performance

Calls up the Arpeggio display (page 41) for Motion Control. Home
Edit Common MS (Edit Common Motion Sequencer) Motion Control
Calls up the Motion Sequencer Lane display (page 165) for Common/Audio Edit. Overview
Quick Edit
Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency)
Determines the Cutoff Frequency for the Filter, when the Low Pass Filter is selected, for example, the Arpeggio
larger the value the brighter the decay. This parameter determines the offset value of the Filter Cutoff Motion Seq
Frequency (page 115) for the Element/Drum Key/Operator Common. Super Knob
Settings: -64 – +63
Knob Auto
Resonance Mixing
Determines the emphasis given to the Cutoff Frequency. This parameter determines the offset value of Scene
the Filter Resonance (page 116) for the Element/Drum Key/Operator Common.
Play / Rec
Settings: -64 – +63
MIDI
FEG Depth Audio
Determines the range over which the cutoff frequency of the Filter EG changes. This parameter
determines the offset value of the FEG Depth (page 118) for the Element/Operator Common.
Settings: -64 – +63

Portamento (Portamento Time)

Determines the pitch transition time when Portamento is applied. This parameter is synchronized to the
same parameter for the Common/Audio Edit.
Settings: -64 – +63

Attack (AEG Attack Time)

Determines the speed of attack from the time a key is played until the maximum initial level of the AEG
is reached. This parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 123, page 143, page 157) for
the Element/Drum Key/Operator.
Settings: -64 – +63

Decay (AEG Decay Time)

Determines how fast the volume falls from maximum attack level to the sustain level. This parameter
determines the offset value of the AEG (page 123, page 143, page 157). for the Element/Drum Key/
Operator
Settings: -64 – +63

Sustain (AEG Sustain Level)

Determines the sustain level at which the volume will continue while a note is held, after the initial attack
and decay. This parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 123, page 143, page 157) for
the Element/Drum Key/Operator.
Settings: -64 – +63

Release (AEG Release Time)

Determines how fast the volume falls from the sustain level to zero when a note is released. This
parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 123, page 143, page 157) for the Element/
Drum Key/Operator.
Settings: -64 – +63

Low Gain (Maser EQ Low Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Lo Mid Gain (Master EQ Low Mid Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Mid Gain (Master EQ Mid Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB

MODX Reference Manual 36

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Hi Mid Gain (Master EQ High Mid Gain) Performance

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High Mid band. Home
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Motion Control
High Gain (Master EQ High Gain) Overview
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High band. Quick Edit
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Arpeggio
Pan (Performance Pan) Motion Seq
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Performance. This parameter offsets the same Super Knob
parameter in the Part Edit setting.
Knob Auto
Settings: L63–C (center)–R63
Mixing
Var Return (Variation Return) Scene
Determines the Return level of the Variation Effect.
Play / Rec
Settings: 0–127
MIDI
Rev Return (Reverb Return) Audio
Determines the Return level of the Reverb Effect.
Settings: 0–127

Common Clock Swing (Common Swing)

Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset
value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part.
Settings: -120 – +120

Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply)

Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance.
This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer
of the Part is set to “Common.”
By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original
one.
Settings: 50%–400%
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.

Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time)

Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset
value for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100 – +100

Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate)

Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the
Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100 – +100

Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude)

Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines
how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting
in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63

Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)

Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the
step curve shape of the sequence.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to
on for the parameter).
Settings: -100 – +100

MODX Reference Manual 37

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Performance

Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the Home
degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane Motion Control
Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the Overview
Smoothness setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane). Quick Edit
Settings: -64 – +63
Arpeggio
Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random) Motion Seq
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree Super Knob
to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
Knob Auto
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63 Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
 When “Part” is set to Part 1–16
You can edit the parameters for the selected Part. MIDI
Audio

Part Category Main (Part Main Category)

Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category)
Determines the Main Category and Sub Category of the Part.
The categories are keywords representing the general characteristics of the Parts. Selecting the
appropriate category makes it easy to find the desired Part from the huge variety of Parts available.
There are 17 Main Categories which indicate types of instruments. There are up to nine Sub Categories
for each Main Category, indicating more detailed types of instruments.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

MODX Reference Manual 38

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Part Name Performance

Enters the desired name for the Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the Home
parameter calls up the input character display.
Motion Control
The parameters below are same as the ones when “Part” is set to “Common” (page 35). Overview
• FEG Atk (FEG Attack Time) Quick Edit
• FEG Decay (FEG Decay Time) Arpeggio
• FEG Rel (FEG Release Time)
Motion Seq
• Cutoff
Super Knob
• Resonance
Knob Auto
• FEG Depth
• Portamento (Portamento Time) Mixing
The setting values differ from the ones which “Part” is set to “Common.” Scene
Settings: 0–127
Play / Rec
• Attack (AEG Attack Time)
MIDI
• Decay (AEG Decay Time)
Audio
• Sustain (AEG Sustain Level)
• Release (AEG Release Time)

FEG Sus (FEG Sustain Level)

Determines the FEG Sustain Level for the Part. This is the offset value for the FEG Decay2 Level of the
Element/Operator Common (page 118).
Settings: -64 – +63

Edit Part EQ
Calls up the Part EQ display (page 78) for Part Edit.

Edit Part Arp (Edit Part Arpeggio)

Calls up the Arpeggio display (page 82) for Part Edit.

Edit Part MS (Edit Part Motion Sequencer)

Calls up the Motion Sequencer Lane display (page 91) for Part Edit.

EQ Low Gain (3 band EQ Low Gain)

Determines the level gain for the Low band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB

EQ Mid Freq (3 band EQ Mid Frequency)

Determines the frequency for the Mid band.
Settings: 139.7Hz–10.1kHz

EQ Mid Gain (3 band EQ Mid Gain)

Determines the level gain for the Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB

EQ Mid Q (3 band EQ Mid Q)

Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Mid band.
Settings: 0.7–10.3

EQ High Gain (3 band EQ Hi Gain)

Determines the level gain of the High band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.
Settings: L63–C (center)–R63

Var Send (Variation Send)

Determines the Send level of the signal sent to the Variation effect.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 39

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Rev Send (Reverb Send) Performance

Determines the Send level of the signal sent to the Reverb effect. Home
Settings: 0–127
Motion Control
Part Clock Swing (Part Swing) Overview
Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel. Quick Edit
• +1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes.
Arpeggio
• -1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes.
Motion Seq
• 0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing.
Super Knob
Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and Knob Auto
bounce.
Settings: -120 – +120
Mixing
Scene
Part Clock Unit (Part Unit Multiply) Play / Rec
Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Part.
MIDI
Settings: 50%–400%, Common
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved. Audio
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.

Part Arp Gate Time (Part Arpeggio Gate Time)

Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value.
This is the offset value for the Gate Time Rate (page 86) of each Arpeggio Select setting.
Settings: 0%–200%

Part Arp Velocity (Part Arpeggio Velocity Rate)

Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value.
This is the offset value for the Velocity Rate (page 85) of each Arpeggio Select setting.
Settings: 0%–200%

Part Motion Seq Amplitude (Part Motion Sequencer Amplitude)

Determines the Amplitude (page 93) of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Amplitude when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63

Part Motion Seq Shape (Part Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)

Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq “Step Curve Parameter” (page 94) when “MS FX” is set
to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on for the parameter.
Settings: -100 – +100

Part Motion Seq Smooth (Part Motion Sequencer Smoothness)

Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Smoothness (page 93) when “MS FX” is set to on for the
Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63

Part Motion Seq Random

Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. “Random” is the degree to
which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 40

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Performance
Arpeggio
Home
From the Arpeggio display you can set Arpeggio-related parameters for multiple Parts. Motion Control
Touching the Arpeggio Type name on this display (or pressing the [CATEGORY] button on the panel) calls
up a menu. In the displayed menu, touch [Search] to call up the Arpeggio Category Search display and Overview
touch [Number] to determine the Arpeggio Type by specifying the Arpeggio Number. Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Motion Control]  [Arpeggio]
Motion Seq

View Arpeggio Type Super Knob

Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Part 9-16 / Part 1-8

Switches between the displays of Parts 9–16 or the Parts 1–8. In case of the picture above, touch the “Part
9-16” to display the Arpeggio Types for the “Part 9-16.”
Settings: Part 9-16 / Part 1-8

Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)

Determines whether the Arpeggio is on or off for the entire Performance. This setting is applied to the [ARP
ON/OFF] button on the panel.
Settings: Off, On

Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)

Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the
Arpeggio of multiple Parts is playing back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you
trigger it. The number indicates the clock.
Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)

Arp (Part Arpeggio Switch)

Determines whether the Arpeggio for each Part is on or off.
Settings: Off, On

Arp Select (Arpeggio Select)

Determines the Arpeggio Types.
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Arpeggios. For details, see
“Copying or Exchanging Arpeggios” (page 86).
Settings: 1–8

MODX Reference Manual 41

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

View Performance
Determines which information regarding Arpeggio Type is displayed. Home
Settings: Category, Number, Range
Motion Control
 When “View” is set to “Category” Overview
Category (Arpeggio Category) Quick Edit
Settings: See the Arpeggio category list (page 11). Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category)
Settings: See the Arpeggio sub category list (page 11). Super Knob
Knob Auto
Name (Arpeggio Name)
Mixing
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Scene
 When “View” is set to “Number” Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Bank (Arpeggio Bank)

Settings: Preset, User, Library 1–8

Number (Arpeggio Number)

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Name (Arpeggio Name)

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

MODX Reference Manual 42

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 When “View” is set to “Range” Performance

Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Name (Arpeggio Name)

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Velocity Limit (Arpeggio Velocity Limit)

Determines the lowest and highest velocity which can trigger Arpeggio playback. For details on
settings of Velocity Limit, see the Owner’s Manual.
Settings: 1–127

Note Limit (Arpeggio Note Limit)

Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggio’s note range. For details on settings of Note
Limit, see the Owner’s Manual.
Settings: C -2 – G8

MODX Reference Manual 43

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Performance
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)
Home

From the Motion Sequencer display you can set parameters related to Motion Sequencer for multiple Parts. Motion Control
Overview
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Motion Control]  [Motion Seq] Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)

Determines whether the Motion Sequencer is on or off for the entire Performance. This setting is applied to
the [MS ON/OFF] button on the panel.
Settings: Off, On

Active (Active Motion Sequencer)

Indicates the number of the active Lane. The number after slash indicates the maximum number of the
Lanes which can be activated simultaneously.

PartSW (Motion Sequencer Part Switch)

Determines whether the Motion Sequencer is on or off for each Part/all Parts.
Settings: Off, On

Lane Switch
Determines whether each Lane is on or off. You can set up to four Lanes corresponding to the Motion
Sequencer function for one Part. Up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire
Performance.
Settings: Off, On

Motion Seq Select (Motion Sequence Select)

Determines the Motion Sequence Type.
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For
details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95).
Settings: 1–8

MODX Reference Manual 44

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Performance
Super Knob
Home

From the Super Knob display you can set parameters controlled by the Super knob. Motion Control
Overview
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Motion Control]  [Super Knob] Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Assignable Knob 1–8 Destination Value 1 Assignable Knob 1–8 Destination Value 2

MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)

Turns the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance on/off. This setting is applied to the [MS ON/OFF]
button on the panel.
Settings: Off, On

Super Knob MS (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Switch)

Turns the Motion Sequencer applied to the Super Knob on/off.
Settings: Off, On

Edit Super Knob Motion Seq

Shows the Knob Auto display, in which you can set the Motion Sequencer for the Super Knob.

Edit Super Knob

Shows the Control Assign display for Common/Audio Edit, in which you can set the parameters to be
controlled by the Super Knob.

LED Pattern (Super Knob LED Pattern)

Determines the lighting pattern of the Super Knob.
Settings: Type 1, Type 2-1, Type 2-2, Type 3-1, Type 3-2, Type 4-1, Type 4-2, Type 5-1, Type 5-2, Type 6, Type 7-1, Type 7-2,
Type 8-1, Type 8-2, Type 9, Type 10, Type 11, Off

Super Knob (Super Knob Value)

Determines the value of the Super Knob.
Settings: 0–127

Super Knob Link

Turns the link between the Assignable Knob and the Super Knob on/off. When this is set to off, the function
value assigned to the corresponding knob does not change even if the Super Knob is controlled.
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 45

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Assignable Knob 1–8 Value Performance

Determines the value for the Assignable Knobs 1–4 (5–8). Home
Settings: 0–127
Motion Control
Assignable Knob 1–8 Destination Value 1 Overview
Assignable Knob 1–8 Destination Value 2 Quick Edit
Determines the lowest value (Assignable value 1) and the highest value (Assignable value 2) for the Arpeggio
corresponding Knob.
When you operate the Super Knob, the Assignable Knob value varies within the specified range. Motion Seq
Settings: 0–127 Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Knob Auto
Scene
From the Knob Auto display you can set parameters related to Motion Sequencer applied to the Super Play / Rec
Knob (Super Knob Motion Sequencer.) The parameter value of the Super Knob can be automatically MIDI
controlled by the Motion Sequencer.
Audio
You can set only one Lane for the Super Knob Motion Sequencer.
NOTE Up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. However, the Lane set for the Super
Knob is not included in the eight referred to here.

Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Motion Control]  [Knob Auto]

MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)

Turns the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance on/off. This setting is applied to the [MS ON/OFF]
button on the panel.
Settings: Off, On

Super Knob MS (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Switch)

Turns the Motion Sequencer applied to the Super Knob on/off.
Settings: Off, On

MS FX (Super Knob Motion Sequencer FX Receive)

Determines whether or not the Motion Sequencer is affected by the knob operation when “ARP/MS” is
selected with the Knob Function [TONE]/[EG/FX]/[EQ]/[ARP/MS] button.
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 46

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Trigger (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Trigger Receive) Performance

Determines whether the signal from the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button is received or not. When this is Home
set to on, the Motion Sequence will begin whenever you press the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button.
Settings: Off, On
Motion Control
Overview
Sequence Select (Super Knob Motion Sequence Select) Quick Edit
Determines the Motion Sequence Type.
Arpeggio
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For
details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95). Motion Seq
Settings: 1–8 Super Knob
Knob Auto
Sync Part (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync Part)
Determines which Part is synchronized with the Super Knob Motion Sequencer. This setting is applied to Mixing
the Note On Setting and the Arp/Motion Seq Grid setting for the selected Part. Scene
Settings: Part 1 – Part 16 Play / Rec
MIDI
Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)
Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is Audio
displayed in clocks.
For the Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. This setting is applied to the Part which
is selected as the Sync Part (above).
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)

Random (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Random)

Determines the degree to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
Settings: 0–127

Sync (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync)

Determines if the playback of the Motion Sequence applied to the Super Knob is synchronized to the
Tempo, Beat, or Arpeggio of the Performance.
Settings: Off, Tempo, Beat, Arp
Off: Super Knob Motion Sequencer plays back according to its own clock and is not synchronized to an external
clock.
Tempo: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Performance tempo.
Beat: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the beat.
Arp: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the 1st beat of the measure of the currently playing
Arpeggio.

Speed (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Speed)

Determines the speed of the playback of the Motion Sequence.
This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is “Off.”
Settings: 0–127

Unit Multiply (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Unit Multiply)

Adjusts the Super Knob Motion Sequencer playback time.
This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is “Off.”
Settings: 50%–6400%, Common
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.

Key On Reset (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Key On Reset)

Determines whether or not the playback of the Motion Sequence is stopped when you play the keyboard.
This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is set to something other than
“Arp.”
Also this parameter is not available when “Trigger” is set to “On.”
Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On
Each-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequence from the beginning.
1st-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequencer from the beginning. If you play a
second note while the first is being held, the Sequence continues cycling according to the same phase as triggered
by the first note—in other words, the Sequence only resets if the first note is released before the second is played.

MODX Reference Manual 47

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Loop (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Loop) Performance

Determines whether the Motion Sequence is played only once or repeatedly. Home
Settings: Off, On
Motion Control
Velocity Limit (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Velocity Limit) Overview
Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values over which the Motion Sequence responds. Quick Edit
Settings: 1–127
Arpeggio
Cycle (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Cycle) Motion Seq
Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence. Super Knob
Settings: 1–16 Knob Auto

Load Sequence Mixing

Loads Motion Sequence data in the User Memory. For details about Loading, see “Load” (page 198). Scene
Play / Rec
Edit Sequence
MIDI
Calls up the Motion Sequence Setting display. You can create a custom Sequence consisting of up to
sixteen steps. Audio

Motion Seq Step Value

Motion Seq Step Type

Cycle (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Cycle)

Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.
Settings: 1–16

Amplitude (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Amplitude)

Determines how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
Settings: 0–127

Smooth (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Smoothness)

Determines the smoothness of the time change of the Motion Sequence.
Settings: 0–127

Sequence Select (Super Knob Motion Sequence Select)

Determines the Motion Sequence Type.
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For
details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95).
Settings: 1–8

MODX Reference Manual 48

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Polarity (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Polarity) Performance

Determines the Sequence Polarity. Home
Settings: Unipolar, Bipolar
Motion Control
Unipolar: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction from a base parameter value according to the Sequence.
Bipolar: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value. Overview
Quick Edit
Motion Seq Step Value (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Value)
Arpeggio
Determines the Step Value for the Motion Sequence. You can control the Step Value 1–4, 5–8, 9–12 or 13–
16 by the Control Sliders 1–4 depending on the cursor position on the display. Motion Seq
Settings: 0–127 Super Knob
Knob Auto
Motion Seq Step Type (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Type)
Mixing
Determines each Step Type of the Motion Sequence. You can switch between the Step Types A and B for
the Step 1–4, 5–8, 9–12 or 13–16 by the SCENE [1/5]–[4/8] buttons depending on the cursor position on Scene
the display. Play / Rec
Settings: A, B
MIDI
Pulse A / Pulse B (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Type) Audio
Determines the Curve Type of the parameter for each of “Pulse A” and “Pulse B.” “Motion Seq Step Type”
described above determines which curve set here is used for each step. The vertical axis indicates the
step value and the horizontal axis indicates the time. For detail about the curve shapes, see page 102.
Settings: For Preset Bank: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle,
Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold
For User Bank: User 1–32
When a Library file is read: Curves in Library 1–8

Direction (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Direction)

Determines the Direction of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.
Settings: Forward, Reverse

Prm1 / Prm2 (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Parameter)

Adjusts the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.
This parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type. Also the range of available parameter
values differs depending on the Curve Type.

Control (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Shape Control Switch)
Determines whether or not to control the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence by operating
Knobs. This parameter is displayed only when “MS FX” is set to on. Also this parameter is not available
depending on the Curve Type.
Settings: Off, On

Store Sequence
Stores the edited Motion Sequence data. For details about storing data, see “Store/Save” (page 201).

MODX Reference Manual 49

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Performance
Mixing
Home
From the Mixing display you can adjust the volume and effect settings for each Part.
Motion Control
NOTE The settings in the Mixing display are stored as part of Performance data.
Overview
Quick Edit
Mixing
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Mixing]
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Part 1-16 / Audio Switch

Part 1-16 / Audio Switch

Switches between the displays of the Mixing settings for Parts 1–16 or the Mixing settings for Parts 1–8, the
Audio Part, the Digital Part, and the Master.
Settings: Part 1-16, Audio

MODX Reference Manual 50

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 When one of Parts 1–16 is selected Performance

Determines the Mixing setting for each Part 1–16. Home
Function Switch Part Category Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Part Category
Indicates the Main category for the Part.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Function Switch
Determines the Mute/Solo setting and the Keyboard Control settings for the selected Part 1–16.
Settings: Mute/Solo, Kbd Ctrl

• When “Mute/Solo” is selected

Mute/Solo (Part Mute/Solo)

Turns the Mute/Solo function on/off for the selected Part 1–16. When the function is on, this button
lights.
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 51

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

• When “Kbd Ctrl” is selected Performance

Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Kbd Ctrl (Keyboard Control)

Turns the Keyboard Control function on/off for the selected Part 1–8. When the function is on, this
button lights.
Settings: Off, On

3-band/2-band Switch EQ

3-band/2-band Switch (3-band EQ/2-band EQ Switch)

Switches between the displays of the 3-band EQ or the 2-band EQ for Parts 1–16.
Settings: 3-band, 2-band

EQ (Equalizer)
Displays the 3-band EQ or the 2-band EQ depending on the “3-band/2-band” setting.
Touching the button calls up the menu of Part EQ Edit.

Rev Send (Reverb Send)

Adjusts the Reverb send level of the selected Part 1–16.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 52

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Var Send (Variation Send) Performance

Adjusts the Variation send level of the selected Part 1–16. Home
Settings: 0–127
Motion Control
Dry Level Overview
Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound of the selected Part 1–16. Quick Edit
Settings: 0–127
Arpeggio
Pan Motion Seq
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part 1–16. Super Knob
Settings: L63–C–R63
Knob Auto
Volume (Part Volume) Mixing
Determines the output level of the selected Part 1–16. Scene
Settings: 0–127 Play / Rec
MIDI
 When “AD” Audio Part or “Digi” Digital Part is selected Audio
Determines the Mixing setting of the Audio/Digital Part.
A/D Part EQ

A/D Part EQ (Audio Part Equalizer)

Displays the 2-band parametric EQ.
Touching the button calls up the menu of Common/Audio Part EQ Edit.

A/D Part Rev Send (Audio Part Reverb Send)

Digital Part Rev Send (Digital Part Reverb Send)
Adjusts the Reverb send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Settings: 0–127

A/D Part Var Send (Audio Part Variation Send)

Digital Part Var Send (Digital Part Variation Send)
Adjusts the Variation send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Settings: 0–127

A/D Part Dry Level (Audio Part Dry Level)

Digital Part Dry Level
Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 53

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

A/D Part Pan (Audio Part Pan) Performance

Digital Part Pan Home
Determines the stereo pan position of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Motion Control
Settings: L63–C–R63
Overview
A/D Volume (Audio Part Volume) Quick Edit
Digital Part Volume Arpeggio
Determines the output level of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Motion Seq
Settings: 0–127
Super Knob
Knob Auto
 When “Mst” (Master Part) is selected
Mixing
Determines the Master Mixing settings.
Master EQ Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Master EQ (Master Equalizer)

Displays the 5-band parametric EQ.
Touching the button calls up the menu of Master EQ Edit.

Rev Return (Reverb Return)

Var Return (Variation Return)
Determines the return level of the Reverb/Variation effect.
Settings: 0–127

Pan (Performance Pan)

Determines the stereo pan position of the entire Performance. This parameter offsets the same
parameter in the Part Edit setting.
Settings: L63–C–R63

Performance Volume
Determines the output level of the entire Performance.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 54

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Performance
Scene
Home
With the Scene function, you can store all parameter settings such as Arpeggio type, Motion Sequencer
Motion Control
type, and the Part parameter values together as a “Scene.” There are eight Scenes and you can select
them by pressing the [SCENE] button. From the Scene display you can edit parameters related to the Overview
Scene function. Quick Edit
When [Memory] is turned on for the function, the Motion Sequencer type, or the Arpeggio type, the Arpeggio
corresponding function information is automatically memorized to the currently selected [SCENE] button.
For information on how to use the Scene function, see the Owner’s Manual. Motion Seq
NOTE You can also change Scene Settings from any other operation displays. To do this, set the parameter value Super Knob
available for the Scene by operating the corresponding Knob or Control Slider, and press one of the SCENE [1/ Knob Auto
5]–[4/8] buttons while holding down the [SHIFT] button. Scenes 1 to 8 are assigned to each button.
Mixing

Scene Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Scene]
Audio

Scene Select
Switches Scenes by selecting tabs. This setting is applied to the SCENE [1/5]–[4/8] buttons on the panel.
Settings: 1–8

Memory (Memorize Switch)

Determines whether or not to memorize each parameter (such as Arpeggio, Motion Sequencer, Super
Knob, Mixing, Amplitude EG, and Arp/MS FX) as a Scene. When this is off, the parameter is not displayed
even when the corresponding tab is selected.
Settings: Off, On

 When the “Arp/Motion Seq” tab is selected and both Memorize Switches for “Arp” and
“Motion Seq” are set to ON

Motion Seq Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)

Determines whether Motion Sequencer is set to ON or OFF for the entire Performance in the selected
Scene.
Settings: Off, On

Motion Seq Select (Motion Sequence Select)

Determines the Motion Sequence type for the selected Scene.
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For
details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95).
Settings: 1–8

MODX Reference Manual 55

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Performance

Determines whether Arpeggio is set to ON or OFF for the entire Performance in the selected Scene. Home
Settings: Off, On
Motion Control
Arp Select (Arpeggio Select) Overview
Determines the Arpeggio type for the selected Scene. Quick Edit
Settings: 1–8
Arpeggio
 When the “Super Knob” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set Motion Seq
to ON Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Super Knob (Super Knob Value)

Determines the Super Knob Value for the selected Scene.
Settings: 0–127

 When the “Mixing 1” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to
ON

Rev Send (Reverb Send)

Adjusts the Reverb Send level of each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 56

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Var Send (Variation Send) Performance

Adjusts the Variation Send level of each Part in the selected Scene. Home
Settings: 0–127
Motion Control
Dry Level Overview
Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound for each Part in the selected Scene. Quick Edit
Settings: 0–127
Arpeggio
Pan Motion Seq
Determines the stereo pan position for each Part in the selected Scene. Super Knob
Settings: L63–C–R63
Knob Auto
Volume (Part Volume) Mixing
Determines the volumes of each Part in the selected Scene. Scene
Settings: 0–127 Play / Rec
MIDI
 When the “Mixing 2” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to Audio
ON

Cutoff
Determines the Cutoff frequency for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63

Res (Resonance)
Determines the resonance for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63

FEG Depth
Determines the Filter Envelope Generator depth (amount of Cutoff Frequency) for each Part in the
selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63

Mute (Part Mute)

Determines the Mute setting for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 57

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 When the “AEG” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to ON Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Attack (AEG Attack Time)

Determines the AEG Attack Time for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63

Decay (AEG Decay Time)

Determines the AEG Decay Time for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63

Sustain (AEG Sustain Level)

Determines the AEG Sustain Level for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63

Release (AEG Release Time)

Determines the AEG Release Time for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63

 When the “Arp/MS FX 1” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set
to ON

MODX Reference Manual 58

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Swing Performance
Determines the Swing setting of Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. Home
For details about Swing, see “Quick Edit” (page 40).
Settings: -120 – +120
Motion Control
Overview
Unit (Part Unit Multiply) Quick Edit
Determines the Unit Multiply setting of Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected
Scene. Arpeggio
Settings: 50%–400%, Common Motion Seq
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved. Super Knob
100%: The normal playback time.
Knob Auto
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.
Mixing
Scene
Gate Time (Gate Time Rate) Play / Rec
Determines the Gate Time Rate of Arpeggio for each Part in the selected Scene.
MIDI
Settings: 0%–200%
Audio
Velocity (Velocity Rate)
Determines the Velocity Rate of Arpeggio for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: 0%–200%

 When the “Arp/MS FX 2” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set
to ON

Amp (Motion Sequencer Amplitude)

Determines the Amplitude of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details about
Amplitude, see “Quick Edit” (page 37).
Settings: -64 – +63

Shape (Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)

Determines the Pulse Shape of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details
about Pulse Shape, see “Quick Edit” (page 37).
Settings: -100 – +100

Smooth (Motion Sequencer Smoothness)

Determines the Smoothness of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details
about Smoothness, see “Quick Edit” (page 38).
Settings: -64 – +63

Random (Motion Sequencer Random)

Determines the “Random” of Motion Sequence for each Part in the selected Scene. For details about
Random, see “Quick Edit” (page 38).
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 59

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Performance
Play/Rec
Home
You can playback/record MIDI data as Songs on this instrument itself or playback/record your
Motion Control
performance (audio data) on a USB flash drive.
Overview
Quick Edit
Play/Rec Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
MIDI
Knob Auto
From the MIDI display you can playback/record your keyboard performance with using the selected Mixing
Performance to the Song. You can playback/record knob operations, controller operations and Arpeggio
Scene
playback as well as your keyboard playing to the specified Track as MIDI events.
Play / Rec
 Playback and Playback Standby MIDI
Audio
Press the [R] (Play) button
Operation or
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Play/Rec]  [MIDI]

Song Length

Track Play Switch

Song Name
Indicates the selected Song name. Touching the Song Name calls up a menu for selecting Load, Rename,
New Song and User Arpeggio.

Performance Name
Indicates the selected Performance Name.

Click Settings
Shows the Tempo settings display.

Time Signature
Indicates the meter of the Song.

Position (Song Position)

Determines the starting position of Recording/Playback. The indicator also shows the current position
during playback.
The measure’s number is in the left cell and the beat number and clocks are in the right cell.

MODX Reference Manual 60

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Tempo Performance
Determines the Song tempo. Home
Settings: 5–300
Motion Control
NOTE The tempo can be set as follows.
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [UTILITY]  [Tempo Settings] (page 207) Overview
Quick Edit
Store Song & Perf Settings
Arpeggio
Changes the Song tempo, Loop settings, and the Performance called back along with the Song to the
current settings. Motion Seq
This parameter is not available during: Super Knob
• New recording (No previously recorded Song data.) Knob Auto
• Playback
Mixing
• Recording Standby
Scene
• Recording
Play / Rec
Loop MIDI
Determines whether the Song plays through a single time or continuously. When this is set to on, the Song Audio
is repeatedly played back between the “Loop Start” and “Loop End” points (below).
Settings: Off, On

Loop Start / End

Determines the start position and the end position of Loop playback. The measure number is in the left cell
and the beat number is in the right cell. This is not available when “Loop” is set to off.

Save As .mid File

Calls up the Store/Save display to save the Song as a file.
This button is not available during:
• New recording (No previously recorded Song data.)
• Playback
• Recording Standby
• Recording
• An external memory such as a USB flash drive is not connected.

Song Length
Indicates the length of the entire sequence.

Track Play Switch

Switches the playback for each track on/off.
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 61

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 Record and Record Standby Performance

Press the [I] (Record) button Home

Operation or Motion Control
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Play/Rec]  [MIDI]  [I] (Record) button
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Time Signature
Determines the meter of the Song.
Settings: 1/16–16/16, 1/8–16/8, 1/4–8/4

Rec Quantize (Record Quantize)

Quantization is the process of adjusting the timing of note events by moving them closer to the nearest
exact beat. You can use this feature, for example, to improve the timing of a performance recorded in real
time. Record quantize aligns the timing of notes automatically, as you record.
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note), Off

Record Type
Determines the Recording Type. This parameter is not available for the first recording.
Settings: Replace, Overdub, Punch
Replace: You can use this method when you want to overwrite an already recorded Track with new data in real time.
The original data will be erased.
Overdub: You can use this method when you want to add more data to a Track that already contains data.
Previously recorded data will be maintained.
Punch: You can use this method when you want to overwrite data to a specified range of a Track that already
contains data. It allows you to overwrite the already recorded data from the starting point to the ending point
(measure/beat) that was specified before recording.

Punch In
Determines the starting point (measure and beat) for recording. This parameter is available only when
“punch” is selected for “Record Type.”

Punch Out
Determines the ending point (measure and beat) for recording. This parameter is available only when
“punch” is selected for “Record Type.”
NOTE For details about the Punch In/Out setting, see the Owner’s Manual.

Undo
The Undo Job cancels the changes you made in your most recent recording session, restoring the data to
its previous state.

Redo
Redo is available only after using Undo, and lets you restore the changes you made before undoing them.

MODX Reference Manual 62

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 Put Track to Arpeggio Performance

This function copies data in the specified measures of a track for creating Arpeggio data. Up to 16 unique Home
note numbers can be recorded to the Arpeggio track. If more than 16 different note numbers have been
recorded to the MIDI sequence data, the Convert operation reduces the notes in excess of the limit. Motion Control
Because of this, be careful to record only up to 16 different notes when you create an Arpeggio, especially Overview
when using multiple tracks. Quick Edit

[R] (PLAY) button Arpeggio

or Motion Seq
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Play/Rec]  [MIDI]  Touch the Song Name to call up the menu 
Super Knob
[User Arp] in the menu
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Arp (Arpeggio Number)

Determines the User Arpeggio number. One of the numbers currently not in use is automatically assigned
by default. When a number already in use is selected, the previous Arpeggio data in the selected number
will be overwritten.
Settings: 1–256

Category (Arpeggio Category)

Determines the Category setting (Main Category and Sub Category) for the created Arpeggio data.
Settings: Refer to the Arpeggio Type Category List in the Reference Manual PDF document.

Name (Arpeggio Name)

Determines the User Arpeggio name. The Arpeggio name can contain up to 20 characters.

Song Track
Determines the track of the source Song for each Arpeggio track.

Convert Type
Determines how the MIDI sequence data (of Song tracks) will be converted to Arpeggio data from the
three ways below. This parameter can be set for each track.
Settings: Normal, Fixed, Org Notes
Normal: The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note and its octave notes.
Fixed: Playing any note(s) will trigger the same MIDI sequence data.
Org Notes (original notes): Basically same as “Fixed” with the exception that the Arpeggio playback notes differ
according to the played chord.

Original Notes Root

Determines the root note when the Convert Type of any track is set to “Org Notes.” This is available only
when any track is set to “Org Notes.”
Settings: C-2 – G8

MODX Reference Manual 63

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Measure Performance
Determines the range of measures to be copied to the Arpeggio data. Home
Settings: 001–999
Motion Control
Store As User Arp (Store As User Arpeggio) Overview
Stores as User Arpeggio following all settings made in this display. This is not available when all tracks are Quick Edit
set to off.
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Audio Knob Auto
Mixing
From the Audio display you can record your performance on the instrument as WAV format (44.1-kHz,
24-bit, stereo) audio files to a USB flash drive. It is possible to record continuously for up to 74 minutes Scene
(assuming that the USB storage device has sufficient free memory). Play / Rec
MIDI
 Playback and Playback Standby
Audio

Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Play/Rec]  [Audio]

Current play position in the Level meter

entire audio data

Audio Name
Indicates the name of the selected Audio file.

Position (Audio Position)

Determines the starting position of Playback. The indicator also shows the current position during
playback.

Audio Volume
Determines the volume of the Audio Playback. This parameter cannot be changed during recording.
Settings: 0–255

Audio Length
Indicates the length of the entire audio data.

Level Meter
Indicates the Audio Input/Output level.

MODX Reference Manual 64

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 Record and Record Standby Performance

Home
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Play/Rec]  [Audio]  [I] (Record) button
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio

Recordable (Audio Recordable Time)

Indicates available recording time. This parameter is displayed only during recording standby.

Trigger Level
Determines the method of starting recording. This parameter is displayed only during recording standby.
If you set the trigger level to “manual,” recording will begin whenever you press the [R] (Play) button.
Alternatively, if you set a value between 1 and 127, recording will begin automatically whenever the [R]
(Play) button is pressed and the playback volume exceeds that level. The level set here will be indicated
by blue triangles in the level meter. For best results, set this parameter as low as possible to capture the
entire signal, but not so low as to record unwanted noise.
Settings: manual, 1–127

MODX Reference Manual 65

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
A Normal Part (AWM2) (having pitched musical instrument sounds) can consist of up to eight Elements. Part Settings
An Element is the basic, smallest unit for a Part. There are two types of Normal Part (AWM2) Edit displays:
Element Common Edit display, for editing settings common to all eight Elements; and Element Edit display, General
for editing individual Elements. Pitch
Zone Settings

Element Common Edit (Common) Zone Transmit

Effect
Routing
Part Settings Ins A
Ins B

General EQ
Ins Assign
From the General display you can set various parameters such as Part Name, Volume, and Pan. Arpeggio
Common
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Part Settings] 
Operation
[General] Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Part Category Main (Part Main Category)
Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category) Scale
Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Part. Element LFO
Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Element EQ
All Element
Part Name
Determines the Part name of the selected Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the Osc
parameter calls up the input character display. Balance

Volume (Part Volume)

Determines the output level of the selected Part.
Settings: 0–127 Copy or Exchange
Elements
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.
Settings: L63–C–R63

MODX Reference Manual 66

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Dry Level Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines the dry sound level (without effect processing) of the selected Part. This is available only when Common
“Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Part Settings
Settings: 0–127
General
Var Send (Variation Send) Pitch
Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Variation effect. This is available only when “Part
Zone Settings
Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0–127 Zone Transmit
Effect
Rev Send (Reverb Send) Routing
Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part
Ins A
Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0–127 Ins B
EQ
Part Output (Part Output Select)
Ins Assign
Determines which audio output is used for the selected Part.
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2...USB7&8, USB1...USB8, Off
Arpeggio
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Common
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Individual
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1...8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Advanced
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Motion Seq
Mono/Poly Common
Selects monophonic or polyphonic playback for the selected Part. Monophonic is for single notes only, and Lane
polyphonic is for playing multiple simultaneous notes.
Mod / Control
Settings: Mono, Poly
Part LFO
Key Assign (Key Assign Mode) Control Assign
Determines the playing method when the same notes are received continuously, and without
Receive SW
corresponding note off messages. For details, refer to the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Settings: Single, Multi Element
Single: Double or repeated playback of the same note is not possible. The first note will be stopped, then the next Osc / Tune
note will be sounded.
Pitch EG
Multi: All notes are sounded simultaneously. This allows playback of the same note when it is played multiple times
in succession (especially for tambourine and cymbal sounds that you would want to ring out to their full decay). Filter
Type
Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only)
Filter EG
Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this
parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block. Scale
Settings: Off, On Amplitude
Level / Pan
Element Pan (Element Pan Switch)
Amp EG
Determines whether the individual pan settings for each Element (made via ([EDIT]  Part selection 
Element selection  [Amplitude]  [Level/Pan]  “Pan”) are applied or not. When this is set to “off,” the Scale
pan position for each Element in the Part is set to center. Element LFO
Settings: Off, On
Element EQ
Velocity Limit All Element
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond. Osc
Each Part will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first specify the Balance
maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range covers both
“1 to 34” and “93 to 127.” For instructions on setting the Velocity Limit, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
Settings: 1–127
Copy or Exchange
Note Limit Elements
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part. Each Part will only sound for
notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for
example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”
Settings: C -2 – G8

MODX Reference Manual 67

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Velocity Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) When Offset (below) is set to 64: Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Determines the degree to which the resulting volume of the Depth=127 Depth=64 Common
127
tone generator responds to your playing strength. The higher
the value, the more the volume changes in response to your Actual resulting Part Settings
velocity
playing strength (as shown below). (affecting the
General
Depth=32
Settings: 0–127 tone generator) Pitch

Depth=0
Zone Settings
0 127 Zone Transmit
Velocity with which you play a note
Effect
Velocity Offset (Velocity Sensitivity Offset)
Routing
Determines the amount by which played velocities are adjusted for the actual resulting velocity effect. This
lets you raise or lower all velocities based on this setting value—allowing you to automatically compensate Ins A
for playing too strongly or too softly. Ins B
Settings: 0–127 EQ
When Depth (above) = 64 When Depth (above) = 64 When Depth (above) = 64 Ins Assign
and Offset = 32 and Offset = 64 and Offset = 96
Arpeggio
127 127 127 Common
Actual Actual Actual
resulting resulting resulting Individual
velocity velocity velocity
(affecting (affecting (affecting Advanced
the tone the tone the tone
generator) generator) generator) Motion Seq

0 64 127 0 64 127 0 64
Common
127
Velocity with which you play a note Velocity with which you play a note Velocity with which you play a note Lane
Mod / Control
You can select a Part with touch operations within these displays: Normal Part (AWM2) Edit, Drum Part Part LFO
Edit, Normal Part (FM-X) Edit, and Common/Audio Edit. These instructions show an example display of
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit. Control Assign
Receive SW
Part Element
Shows a currently selected Part. By touching a Part, a pop-up list appears, and then you can select a
Osc / Tune
different Part for editing.
Settings: Common, Part 1–16 Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Pitch Filter EG

From the Pitch display you can set Pitch-related parameters for the Part. Scale
Amplitude
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Part Settings]  Level / Pan
Operation
[Pitch]
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 68

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Portamento Master SW (Portamento Master Switch) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the Common
next. The Portamento Master Switch determines whether Portamento is applied to the entire Performance
or not. Part Settings
Settings: Off, On General
Pitch
Portamento Part SW (Portamento Part Switch)
Zone Settings
Determines whether Portamento is applied to the selected Part or not.
Settings: Off, On Zone Transmit
Effect
Portamento Mode Routing
Determines the Portamento mode.
Ins A
Settings: Fingered, Full-time
Fingered: Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous Ins B
one). EQ
Full-time: Portamento is applied to all notes.
Ins Assign
Portamento Time Arpeggio
Determines the pitch transition time or rate when Portamento is applied. Common
Settings: 0–127 Individual

Portamento Time Mode Advanced

Determines how the pitch changes in time. Motion Seq
Settings: Rate 1, Time 1, Rate 2, Time 2 Common
Rate 1: Pitch changes at the specified rate.
Lane
Time 1: Pitch changes in the specified time.
Rate 2: Pitch changes at the specified rate within an octave.
Mod / Control
Time 2: Pitch changes in the specified time within an octave. Part LFO
Control Assign
Portamento Legato Slope
Receive SW
Determines the speed of the attack of legato notes, when “Mono/Poly” is set to “Mono.” (Legato notes
“overlap” each other, the next being played before the previous is released.) Element
Settings: 0–7 Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Note Shift
Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for each Part in semitones. Filter
Settings: -24 – +0 – +24 Type
Filter EG
Detune
Scale
Determines the pitch settings of the selected Part in 0.1 Hz increments.
Settings: -12.8Hz – +0.0Hz – +12.7Hz Amplitude
Level / Pan
Pitch Bend / (Pitch Bend Range Upper/Lower) Amp EG
Determines the maximum Pitch Bend Range in semitones.
Scale
Settings: -48 – +0 – +24
Element LFO
Micro Tuning Name Element EQ
Determines the tuning system for the selected Part. For information on the various tuning systems, see the All Element
Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Settings: Equal Temperament, Pure Major, Pure Minor, Werckmeister, Kirnberger, Vallotti & Young, 1/4 shift, 1/4 tone, 1/8 tone,
Osc
Indian, Arabic 1, Arabic 2, Arabic 3, User 1–8 (when the User Bank is selected), Library 1-1 – 8-8 (when the Library Balance
file is read)

Micro Tuning Root

Determines the root note for the Micro Tuning function. This root note setting may not be necessary Copy or Exchange
depending on the “Micro Tuning Name” type. Elements
Settings: C–B

MODX Reference Manual 69

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Edit User Tuning Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Calls up the User Micro Tuning Setting display. Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Tuning No. (Micro Tuning Number) Lane
Indicates the selected User Micro Tuning Number. Mod / Control
Settings: 1–8
Part LFO
Tuning Name (Micro Tuning Name) Control Assign
Determines the name of the selected User Micro Tuning. Touching the parameter calls up the input Receive SW
character display.
Element
C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B Osc / Tune
Adjusts the pitch of each note in 1 cent steps determines the Micro Tuning. Pitch EG
Settings: -99 – +99 Filter

Initialize Type
Initializes the selected User Micro Tuning. Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 70

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Zone Settings
Common
From the Zone Setting display you can set Zone-related parameters. Part Settings
You can divide the keyboard into a maximum of eight independent areas (called “Zones”). To each Zone
General
can be assigned different MIDI channels. This makes it possible to control several Parts of the multi-timbral
tone generator simultaneously by a single keyboard or to control Parts of an external MIDI instrument over Pitch
several different channels in addition to the internal Parts of this synthesizer itself—letting you use the Zone Settings
MODX to effectively do the work of several keyboards.
Zone Transmit
To activate this display, select [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Advanced], then set “Zone Master” to “ON.”
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual. Effect
Routing
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Part Settings] 
Operation Ins A
[Zone Settings]
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Zone (Zone Switch)
Type
Determines whether the Zone function is used (on) or not (off). When this is set to off, all of the following
parameters are not available. Filter EG
Settings: Off, On Scale
Amplitude
Int SW (Internal Switch)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by playing the keyboard in the range of the selected Zone Level / Pan
are transmitted to the internal tone generator or not. Amp EG
Settings: Off, On Scale
Element LFO
Transmit Ch (Transmit Channel)
Determines the MIDI Transmit Channel for the selected Zone. Element EQ
Settings: Ch1–Ch16, Off All Element
Osc
Note Limit
Balance
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the range for the selected Zone. The selected Zone will sound
only when you play notes within this range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for
example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”
Settings: C -2 – G8
Copy or Exchange
Elements
Octave Shift
Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down. You can adjust the
offset up or down over a maximum range of three octaves.
Settings: -3 – +0 (Default) – +3

Transpose
Determines the amount in semitones by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down.
Settings: -11 – +0 (Default) – +11

MODX Reference Manual 71

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Bank Select (Transmit Bank Select) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. Common
This is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.
Part Settings
Settings: Off, On
General
Pgm Change (Transmit Program Change) Pitch
Determines whether Program Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This
Zone Settings
is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.
Settings: Off, On Zone Transmit
Effect
Vol/Exp (Transmit Volume/Expression) Routing
Determines whether volume messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not
Ins A
available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.
Settings: Off, On Ins B
EQ
Pan (Transmit Pan)
Ins Assign
Determines whether Pan messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not
available when the Transmit Channel is set to off. Arpeggio
Settings: Off, On Common
Individual
MIDI Bank MSB/LSB (Bank Select MSB/LSB)
Advanced
Determines the Bank numbers to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting the
Performance. The Bank consists of MSB and LSB values. This is not available when “Transmit Bank Select” Motion Seq
is set to off. Common
Settings: 000–127
Lane
MIDI Pgm Num (Program Change Number) Mod / Control
Determines the Program Change Number to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting Part LFO
the Performance. This is not available when the “Transmit Program Change” is set to off. Control Assign
Settings: 001–128
Receive SW
MIDI Volume Element
Determines the transmit volume to the external tone generator when selecting the Performance. Osc / Tune
This is not available when the Transmit Volume/Expression is set to “off”.
Pitch EG
Settings: 0–127
Filter
MIDI Pan Type
Determines the Pan to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting the Performance. Filter EG
This is not available when the Transmit Pan is set to “off.”
Scale
Settings: L64–C–R63
Amplitude
MIDI Send Level / Pan
By turning this parameter on, MIDI Bank, MIDI Pgm Number, MIDI Volume, or MIDI Pan is transmitted to Amp EG
the external tone generator depending on the setting of the Transmit Switch.
This is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off or when all of the four Transmit Switches are set Scale
to off. Element LFO
Settings: Off, On Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 72

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Zone Transmit
Common
From the Zone Transmit display you can set how each individual zone affects transmission of various MIDI Part Settings
data, such as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to
General
“on,” playing the selected zone will transmit the corresponding MIDI data.
All settings made in this display are not available when “Transmit Ch” is set to “Off” in the Zone Setting Pitch
display. Zone Settings
To activate this display, select [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Advanced], then set “Zone Master” to “ON.”
Zone Transmit
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
Effect
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Part Settings]  Routing
Operation
[Zone Transmit]
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Pgm Change (Transmit Program Change) Filter
Determines whether Program Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. Type
Settings: Off, On
Filter EG
Bank Select (Transmit Bank Select) Scale
Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. Amplitude
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Level / Pan
Settings: Off, On
Amp EG
Pitch Bend (Transmit Pitch Bend) Scale
Determines whether Pitch Bend messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. Element LFO
Settings: Off, On
Element EQ
CC (Transmit Control Change) All Element
Determines whether Control Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. Osc
Settings: Off, On
Balance

Vol/Exp (Transmit Volume/Expression)

Determines whether volume messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Copy or Exchange
Settings: Off, On Elements

Pan (Transmit Pan)

Determines whether Pan messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 73

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MW (Transmit Modulation Wheel) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel are transmitted to the Common
external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Part Settings
Settings: Off, On General
Pitch
Sustain (Transmit Sustain)
Zone Settings
Determines whether Sustain messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Zone Transmit
Settings: Off, On Effect
Routing
FC1/FC2 (Transmit Fool Controller)
Ins A
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Controller are transmitted to
the external tone generator or not. Ins B
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. EQ
Settings: Off, On
Ins Assign
FS (Transmit Foot Switch) Arpeggio
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Switch are transmitted to the Common
external tone generator or not. Individual
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Advanced
Settings: Off, On
Motion Seq
A. SW1/A. SW2 (Transmit Assignable Switch) Common
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are
Lane
transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Mod / Control
Settings: Off, On Part LFO
Control Assign
MS Hold (Transmit Motion Sequencer Hold)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button are Receive SW
transmitted to the external tone generator or not. Element
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Osc / Tune
Settings: Off, On
Pitch EG
MS Trigger (Transmit Motion Sequencer Trigger) Filter
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button are Type
transmitted to the external tone generator or not. Filter EG
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Scale
Amplitude
A.Knob1–8 (Transmit Assignable Knob) Level / Pan
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Assignable Knobs 1–4 (5–8) are transmitted
Amp EG
to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Scale
Settings: Off, On Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 74

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Effect
Common
Part Settings
Routing General
From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for Parts. Pitch
Zone Settings
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Effect] [Routing] Zone Transmit
Effect
Ins FX SW Insertion FX A Switch
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element

Insertion FX B Switch
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Element 1–8 (Element Connection Switch) Filter
Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Element. The “Thru” setting Type
lets you bypass the Insertion Effects for the specified element.
Filter EG
Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B)
Scale
Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch) Amplitude
Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not.
Level / Pan
For Parts 9-16, the Ins FX SW is shown at the center of the page, and the Insertion effect of the currently
being edited Part can be switched ON or OFF. Amp EG
Settings: Off, On Scale
Element LFO
Category (Effect Category)
Element EQ
Type (Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected Effect. All Element
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the Osc
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Balance
Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed Copy or Exchange
settings. Elements
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document.

MODX Reference Manual 75

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

The Side Chain/Modulator uses the output from one track to control an effect in a different track. You can Common
specify the Effect type for activating the feature so that input signals for Parts other than the selected Part
or the audio input signal can control the specified Effect. This may not be active depending on the Part Settings
particular Effect Type. General
Here you can determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. Pitch
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
Zone Settings
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off
Zone Transmit
Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type) Effect
Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram Routing
in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect
connection” (page 20) of the “Basic Structure.” Ins A
Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA Ins B
EQ
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Ins Assign
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the
Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.” Arpeggio
Settings: 0–127 Common
Individual
Var Send (Variation Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Advanced
Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.” Motion Seq
Settings: 0–127 Common
Lane
Part Output (Part Output Select)
Determines the specific audio output. Mod / Control
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8, Off Part LFO
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Control Assign
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2…7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Receive SW
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1…8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output. Element
Osc / Tune
Envelope Follower
Pitch EG
Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. For details on the Envelope Follower, see the “Envelope
Follower Block” (page 21) in the “Basic Structure.” Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

Part (Input Source)

Displays the Part as “Input Source” for the selected Envelope Follower.
Settings: Master, AD, Part 1–Part 16

MODX Reference Manual 76

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Gain (Envelope Follower Gain) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines the Input gain of the Input Source set in “Part.” Common
Settings: -24dB – 0dB – +24dB
Part Settings
Attack (Envelope Follower Attack) General
Determines the attack time of the Envelope Follower. Pitch
Settings: 1ms–40ms Zone Settings

Release (Envelope Follower Release) Zone Transmit

Determines the release time of the Envelope Follower. Effect
Settings: 10ms–680ms Routing
Ins A
Input Level
Indicates the Input Level of the signal from the Input Source set in “Part.” Ins B
EQ
Envelope Follower Output Ins Assign
Indicates the Output Level of the Envelope Follower.
Arpeggio
Edit Common
Calls up the Control Assign display for the Destination Part. Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Ins A (Insertion Effect A)
Common
Ins B (Insertion Effect B)
Lane
From the Insertion Effect A/Insertion Effect B display you can set parameters related to Insertion Effect. Mod / Control
Part LFO
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Effect]  [Ins A] /
Operation Control Assign
[Ins B]
Receive SW
Insertion FX Switch
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Effect Parameter
Copy or Exchange
Elements
Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch)
Determines whether the selected Insertion Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 77

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Category (Effect Category) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Type (Effect Type) Common
Determines the category and type for the selected Insertion Effect.
Part Settings
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. General
Pitch
Preset
Zone Settings
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed Zone Transmit
settings. Effect
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect types, see the Data List PDF document. Routing

Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part) Ins A

The Side Chain/Modulator uses the output from one track to control an effect in a different track. You can Ins B
specify the Effect type for activating the feature so that input signals for Parts other than the selected Part EQ
or the audio input signal can control the specified Effect. This may not be active depending on the
Ins Assign
particular Effect Type.
Here you can determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. Arpeggio
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part. Common
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Individual

Effect Parameter Advanced

Active Effect parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect Motion Seq
parameters, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect parameter, Common
see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Lane
Mod / Control
EQ (Part Equalizer) Part LFO
Control Assign
From the Part Equalizer display you can set parameters related to Part EQ.
Receive SW
Element
Part
Osc / Tune
3-band EQ Insertion Effect 2-band EQ Pitch EG
Filter
Part EQ Part EQ
Type
Filter EG
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Effect]  [EQ]
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 78

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

3-band EQ / 2-band EQ (3-band EQ/2-band EQ Switch) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Switches displays between 3-band EQ and 2-band EQ. Common
Settings: 3-band EQ, 2-band EQ
Part Settings
General
 When “3-band EQ” is selected
Pitch
From this display you can make 3-band EQ settings.
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
EQ Low Gain (3-band EQ Low Gain)
Receive SW
Determines the level gain of the Low band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB Element
Osc / Tune
EQ Mid Gain (3-band EQ Middle Gain)
Pitch EG
Determines the level gain of the Mid band.
Filter
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Type
EQ Hi Gain (3-band EQ High Gain) Filter EG
Determines the level gain of the High band.
Scale
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Amplitude
EQ Low Freq (3-band EQ Low Frequency) Level / Pan
Determines the frequency for the Low band. Amp EG
Settings: 50.1Hz–2.00kHz
Scale
EQ Mid Freq (3-band EQ Middle Frequency) Element LFO
Determines the frequency for the Mid band. Element EQ
Settings: 139.7Hz–10.1kHz
All Element

EQ Hi Freq (3-band EQ High Frequency) Osc

Determines the frequency for the High band. Balance
Settings: 503.8Hz–14.0kHz

EQ Mid Q (3-band EQ Middle Q)

Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Mid band. Copy or Exchange
Settings: 0.7–10.3 Elements

MODX Reference Manual 79

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

 When “2-band EQ” is selected Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

From this display you can make 2-band EQ settings. Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
EQ1 Type (2-band EQ1 Type)/EQ2 Type (2-band EQ2 Type) Lane
Determines the Equalizer Type. Mod / Control
Settings: Thru, LPF, HPF, Low Shelf, Hi Shelf, Peak/Dip Part LFO
Thru: This setting bypasses the equalizers leaving the entire signal unaffected.
Control Assign
LPF/HPF: This setting only passes signals below or above the Cutoff Frequency.
Low Shelf/Hi Shelf: This setting attenuates/boosts the signal at frequencies above or below the specified Receive SW
Frequency setting Element
Low Shelf High Shelf Osc / Tune
Gain Gain
+ Frequency
+ Pitch EG
Frequency
Filter
0 0 Type
Filter EG
– – Scale
Frequency Frequency
Amplitude
Peak/Dip: This setting attenuates/boosts the signal at the specified Frequency setting.
Level / Pan
+ Gain Amp EG
Frequency
Scale
0 Element LFO
Frequency
Element EQ
All Element
–
Osc
EQ 1 Gain (2-band EQ1 Gain)/EQ 2 Gain (2-band EQ2 Gain) Balance
Determines the level gain of the frequency set in “EQ1 Freq” or “EQ2 Freq.”
This is not active when “EQ Type” is set to “Thru,” “LPF,” or “HPF.”
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Copy or Exchange
EQ 1 Freq (2-band EQ1 Frequency)/EQ 2 Freq (2-band EQ2 Frequency) Elements
Determines the frequency to be attenuated/boosted.
This is not active when “EQ Type” is set to “Thru.”
Settings: 63Hz–18.0Hz

MODX Reference Manual 80

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

EQ 1 Q (2-band EQ1 Q)/EQ 2 Q (2-band EQ2 Q) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines the EQ bandwidth for the frequency which is set in “EQ 1 Freq/EQ2 Freq.” This is available Common
only when “EQ Type” is set to “Peak/Dip.”
Part Settings
Settings: 0.1–12.0
NOTE For details on EQ structure, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. General
Pitch
Output Level (2-band Output Level)
Zone Settings
Determines the Output level of the 2-band EQ.
Zone Transmit
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Effect
Routing
Ins Assign (Insertion Assign) Ins A
Ins B
In the Insertion Assign display, you can set the Insertion Effect for Parts 9–16.
EQ
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Effect]  Ins Assign
Operation
[Ins Assign]
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Active (Active Part) Amplitude
Shows the number of Parts with the Ins FX SW set to ON. The number that follows the slash (/) sign is the Level / Pan
maximum number of Insertion Effects that can be simultaneously set to ON.
Amp EG
Part9–Part16 Scale
Sets the Insertion Effect for Parts 9-16 ON or OFF. Element LFO
Settings: Off, On
Element EQ
NOTE The Insertion Effect for Parts 1–8 is always ON.
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 81

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Arpeggio
Common
Part Settings
Common General
From the Common display you can set Arpeggio-related parameters for the Part. Pitch
Zone Settings
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Arpeggio] 
Operation Zone Transmit
[Common]
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch) Osc / Tune
Determines whether the Arpeggio for the selected Part is active or not.
Pitch EG
Settings: Off, On
Filter
Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Type
Determines whether the Arpeggio for the entire Performance is active or not. Filter EG
Settings: Off, On
Scale
Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value) Amplitude
Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the Level / Pan
Arpeggios for Parts are being played back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you
Amp EG
trigger it. The number shown at right of each value indicates the resolution in clocks.
Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet), Scale
480 (1/4 note) Element LFO
Element EQ
Hold
Determines whether the Arpeggio continues cycling after the keys are released. All Element
Settings: Sync-off, Off, On Osc
Sync-off: Arpeggio playback continues to run silently, even when you release the keys. Pressing any key turns Balance
Arpeggio playback on again, and the Arpeggio is heard from the point in the cycle where playback is resumed.
Off: The Arpeggio plays only while you hold the keys.
On: The Arpeggio cycles automatically, even if you release your fingers from the keys.
Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 82

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Key Mode Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines how the Arpeggio plays back when playing the keyboard. Common
Settings: Sort, Thru, Direct, Sort+Drct, Thru+Drct
Part Settings
Sort: When you play specific notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the same sequence plays, no matter what
order you play the notes. General
Thru: When you play specific notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the resulting sequence differs depending on Pitch
the order of the notes.
Direct: Note events of the Arpeggio sequence do not play; only the notes you play on the keyboard are heard. When
Zone Settings
the Arpeggio plays back, events such as Pan and Brightness are applied to the sound of your keyboard Zone Transmit
performance. Use this setting when the Arpeggio types include non-note data or when you set the Arpeggio
Category to Control. Effect
Sort+Drct: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Sort setting, and the notes played are also sounded. Routing
Thru+Drct: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Thru setting, and the notes played are also sounded. Ins A
Ins B
Velocity (Velocity Rate)
Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. If the resulting EQ
Velocity value is 0, it will be set to 1. If the resulting Velocity value is greater than 128 it will be set to 127. Ins Assign
Settings: 0%–200% Arpeggio

Gate Time (Gate Time Rate) Common

Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. If the Individual
resulting Gate Time value is 0, it will be set to 1. Advanced
Settings: 0%–200%
Motion Seq
Change Timing Common
Determines the actual timing at which the Arpeggio type is switched when you select another type during Lane
Arpeggio playback. When set to “Real-time,” the Arpeggio type is switched immediately. When set to Mod / Control
“Measure,” the Arpeggio type is switched at the top of the next measure.
Settings: Real-time, Measure
Part LFO
Control Assign
Loop Receive SW
Determines whether the Arpeggio plays through a single time or continuously, while notes are held.
Element
Settings: Off, On
Osc / Tune
Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only) Pitch EG
Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this Filter
parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block.
Type
Settings: Off, On
Filter EG
Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid) Scale
Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is
Amplitude
displayed in clocks.
For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. Level / Pan
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet), Amp EG
480 (1/4 note)
Scale
Qntz Strength (Quantize Strength) Element LFO
This parameter sets the “strength” by which note events are pulled toward the quantize beat set in “Arp/MS Element EQ
Grid.” A setting of 100% produces exact timing set in “Arp/MS Grid.” A setting of 0% results in no All Element
quantization.
Settings: 0%–100%
Osc
Balance
Unit (Part Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Arpeggio playback time. By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio from the
original one.
Settings: 50%, 66%, 75%, 100%, 133%, 150%, 200%, 266%, 300%, 400%, Common Copy or Exchange
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved. Elements
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.

MODX Reference Manual 83

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Swing Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel. Common
• +1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes.
Part Settings
• -1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes.
General
• 0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing.
Pitch
Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and bounce. Zone Settings
Settings: -120 – +120
Zone Transmit
Velocity Limit (Arpeggio Velocity Limit) Effect
Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values in which the Arpeggio responds. Each Arpeggio Routing
will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first specify the maximum value
Ins A
and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range covers both “1 to 34” and “93
to 127.” Ins B
Settings: 1–127 EQ
Ins Assign
Note Limit (Arpeggio Note Limit)
Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggio’s note range. Each Arpeggio will only sound for Arpeggio
notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for Common
example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.” Individual
Settings: C -2 – G8
Advanced
Octave Shift (Arpeggio Output Octave Shift) Motion Seq
Shifts the pitch of the Arpeggio up or down in octaves. Common
Settings: -10 – +0 – +10 Lane

Octave Range (Arpeggio Octave Range) Mod / Control

Specifies the maximum Arpeggio range in octaves. Part LFO
Settings: -3 – +0 – +3 Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 84

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Individual
Common
From the Individual display you can set parameters corresponding to Arpeggio Selects 1–8. Part Settings
Touching the Arpeggio Type Setting calls up a menu. In the displayed menu, touch [Search] to call up the
General
Arpeggio Category Search display (page 180) and touch [Number] to determine the Arpeggio Type by
specifying the Arpeggio Number. Pitch
Zone Settings
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Arpeggio] 
Operation Zone Transmit
[Individual]
Effect
Arpeggio Type Settings
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch) Pitch EG
Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Filter
Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value) Type
Same as in the Common display.
Filter EG
Arp (Arpeggio Select) Scale
Selects the desired Arpeggio stored as Arpeggio Select. Amplitude
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Arpeggios. For details, see Level / Pan
“Copying or Exchanging Arpeggios” (page 86).
Amp EG
Settings: 1–8
Scale
Category (Arpeggio Category) Element LFO
Indicates the selected Arpeggio Category.
Element EQ
Settings: See the “Arpeggio Category List” on page 11.
All Element
Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category) Osc
Indicates the selected Arpeggio Sub Category. Balance
Settings: See the “Arpeggio Sub Category List” on page 11.

Name (Arpeggio Name)

Indicates the selected Arpeggio Name. Copy or Exchange
Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Elements

Velocity (Velocity Rate)

Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. If the resulting
Velocity value is 0, it will be set to 1. If the resulting Velocity value is greater than 128 it will be set to 127.
Settings: -100% – +100%

MODX Reference Manual 85

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Gate Time (Gate Time Rate) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. If the Common
resulting Gate Time value is 0, it will be set to 1.
Part Settings
Settings: -100% – +100%
General
Pitch
 Copying or Exchanging Arpeggios Zone Settings
You can copy or exchange between Arpeggio types.
Zone Transmit
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Select Part to be copied  [Arpeggio]  [Individual]  Effect
[SHIFT] + [EDIT]
Routing
Operation or
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Motion Control]  [Arpeggio]  Select Part to be copied  [SHIFT] + Ins A
[EDIT] Ins B
EQ
Copy Exchange
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
1 3 Motion Seq
Common
Lane
2 4 Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
NOTE You can select “All” for Arp Select when copying between different Parts.
Scale
Copy Amplitude
Touching this button activates the Arpeggio Type Copy function. Level / Pan

Exchange Amp EG
Touching this button activates the Arpeggio Type Exchange function. Scale
Element LFO
1 Part to be copied (or exchanged)
Element EQ
NOTE The currently selected Part is set automatically and this setting cannot be changed.
All Element
2 Arpeggio Select to be copied (or exchanged) Osc
Balance
3 Copy (or exchange) destination Part

4 Copy (or exchange) destination Arpeggio Select

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 86

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Advanced
Common
From the Advanced display you can set advanced parameters related to the Arpeggio function. Part Settings
General
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Arpeggio] 
Operation Pitch
[Advanced]
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch)
Receive SW
Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)
Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value) Element
Same as in the Common display. Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Accent Vel Threshold (Accent Velocity Threshold)
Filter
Determines the minimum velocity that will trigger the Accent Phrase.
Accent Phrases are composed of sequence data included in some Arpeggio types, sounding only when Type
you play notes at a velocity higher (stronger) than that specified in the Accent Velocity Threshold Filter EG
parameter. If it is difficult to play at velocities necessary to trigger the Accent Phrase, set the “Accent Vel
Scale
Threshold” (Accent Velocity Threshold) parameter to a lower value.
NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the Data List PDF document.
Amplitude
Settings: off, 1–127 Level / Pan
Amp EG
Accent Start Quantize
Scale
Determines the start timing of the Accent Phrase when the Velocity specified in Accent Velocity Threshold
above is received. When this is set to off, the Accent Phrase starts as soon as the Velocity is received. Element LFO
When this is set to on, the Accent Phrase starts on the beat specified for each Arpeggio type after the Element EQ
Velocity is received.
All Element
Settings: off, on
Osc
Random SFX Balance
Determines whether Random SFX is active or not.
Some Arpeggio types feature a Random SFX function which will trigger special sounds (such as guitar fret
noises) when the note is released.
NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the Data List PDF Copy or Exchange
document. Elements
Settings: off, on

Random SFX Velocity Offset

Determines the offset value by which the Random SFX notes will be shifted from their original velocities.
Settings: -64 – +0 – +63

MODX Reference Manual 87

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Random SFX Key On Ctrl (Random SFX Key On Control) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
When this is set to “on,” the Random SFX sound is played at the velocity generated by the playing of each Common
note. When this is set to “off,” a special Random SFX sound is played at a pre-programmed velocity.
Part Settings
Settings: off, on
General
Velocity Mode Pitch
Adjusts the velocity of the Arpeggio notes.
Zone Settings
Settings: Original, Thru
Original: The Arpeggio plays back at the Velocity set for the Arpeggio Type.
Zone Transmit
Thru: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Velocity of your playing. Effect
Routing
Trigger Mode
Ins A
When this is set to “Gate,” pressing the note starts Arpeggio playback and releasing the note stops it.
When this is set to “Toggle,” pressing the note starts/stops Arpeggio playback and releasing the note does Ins B
not affect Arpeggio playback. EQ
Settings: Gate, Toggle Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer) Individual
Advanced
Common Motion Seq
Common
From the Common display you can set the parameters related to Motion Sequencer for the Part.
Lane
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Motion Seq]  Mod / Control
Operation
[Common]
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc

Common Clock Swing (Common Swing) Balance

Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset
value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part.
Settings: -120 – +120
Copy or Exchange
Elements
Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance.
This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer of
the Part is set to “Common.”
By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original one.
Settings: 50%–400%
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.

MODX Reference Manual 88

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value Common
for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Part Settings
Settings: -100% – +100%
General
Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate) Pitch
Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the
Zone Settings
Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100% – +100% Zone Transmit
Effect
Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude) Routing
Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines
Ins A
how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane Ins B
Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting in EQ
the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Ins Assign
Settings: -64 – +63
Arpeggio
Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape) Common
Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the step Individual
curve shape of the sequence.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane Advanced
Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape Motion Seq
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on Common
for the parameter).
Lane
Settings: -100 – +100
Mod / Control
Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Part LFO
Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the
Control Assign
degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane Receive SW
Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the Smoothness Element
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane). Osc / Tune
Settings: -64 – +63
Pitch EG
Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random) Filter
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree to Type
which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
Filter EG
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63 Scale
Amplitude
Part Clock Swing (Clock Swing)
Level / Pan
Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. This parameter delays
notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel. Amp EG
• +1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes. Scale
• -1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes. Element LFO
• 0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing. Element EQ

Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and bounce. All Element
Settings: -120 – +120 Osc
Balance
Part Clock Unit (Part Unit Multiply)
This adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Part.
Settings: 50%–400%, Common
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved. Copy or Exchange
100%: The normal playback time. Elements
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.

MODX Reference Manual 89

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Part Arp Gate Time (Part Arpeggio Gate Time) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. This is Common
the offset value for the Gate Time Rate (page 86) of each Arpeggio Select setting.
Part Settings
Settings: 0%–200%
General
Part Arp Velocity (Part Arpeggio Velocity Rate) Pitch
Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. This is the offset
Zone Settings
value for the Velocity Rate (page 85) of each Arpeggio Select setting.
Settings: 0%–200% Zone Transmit
Effect
Part Motion Seq Amplitude (Part Motion Sequencer Amplitude) Routing
Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
Ins A
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Amplitude (page 93) when “MS FX” is set to on for the
Lane. Ins B
Settings: -64 – +63 EQ
Ins Assign
Part Motion Seq Shape (Part Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)
Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. Arpeggio
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq “Step Curve Parameter” (page 94) when “MS FX” is set to Common
on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on for the parameter. Individual
Settings: -100 – +100
Advanced
Part Motion Seq Smooth (Part Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Motion Seq
Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. Common
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Smoothness (page 93) when “MS FX” is set to on for the
Lane
Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63 Mod / Control
Part LFO
Part Motion Seq Random (Part Motion Sequencer Random) Control Assign
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. “Random” is the degree to which
the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed. Receive SW
Settings: 0–127 Element
Osc / Tune
Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)
Pitch EG
Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is
displayed in clocks. Filter
For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. Type
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet), Filter EG
480 (1/4 note)
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 90

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Lane
Common
From the Lane display you can set parameters for each Lane of the Motion Sequencer. Part Settings
General
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Motion Seq] 
Operation Pitch
[Lane]
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Motion Seq Master SW (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)
Receive SW
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance is active or not.
Settings: Off, On Element
Osc / Tune
Motion Seq Part SW (Motion Sequencer Part Switch) Pitch EG
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part is active or not.
Filter
Settings: Off, On
Type
Lane SW (Lane Switch) Filter EG
Determines whether each Lane is active or not. Up to four Lanes of Motion Sequencer can be used for one
Scale
Part and up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. When this is set to off,
parameters related to the corresponding Lane will not be displayed. Amplitude
Settings: Off, On Level / Pan
Amp EG
MS FX (Lane Motion Sequencer FX Receive)
Scale
Determines whether or not the selected Lane is affected by Knob operations when the “ARP/MS” is
selected with the Knob Function [TONE]/[EG/FX]/[EQ]/[ARP/MS] button. Element LFO
Settings: Off, On Element EQ
All Element
Trigger (Lane Motion Sequencer Trigger Receive)
Determines whether or not the selected Lane receives the signal generated by [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] Osc
button. When this is set to on, the Motion Sequence will begin whenever you press the [MOTION SEQ Balance
TRIGGER] button.
Settings: Off, On

Sequence Select (Lane Motion Sequence Select) Copy or Exchange

Selects the desired Motion Sequence. Elements
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For
details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95).
Settings: 1–8

MODX Reference Manual 91

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Sync (Lane Motion Sequencer Sync) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines if the playback of the Motion Sequence applied to the Destination (set in the Control Assign Common
display (page 100)) is synchronized to the Tempo, Beat, or Arpeggio of the Performance.
Part Settings
Settings: Off, Tempo, Beat, Arp, Lane 1 (when Lane 2–4 is selected)
Off: Lane Motion Sequencer plays back according to its own clock and is not synchronized to an external clock. General
Tempo: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Performance tempo. Pitch
Beat: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the beat. Zone Settings
Arp: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the 1st beat of the measure of the currently playing Arpeggio.
Zone Transmit
Lane 1: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Lane 1.
Effect
Speed (Lane Motion Sequencer Speed) Routing
Determines the playback speed of the Motion Sequence.
Ins A
This is available only when the “Lane Motion Sequencer Sync” is set to “Off.”
Settings: 0–127 Ins B
EQ
Unit Multiply (Lane Motion Sequencer Unit Multiply) Ins Assign
Adjusts the Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Lane.
This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Off” and Arpeggio
“Lane 1.” Common
Settings: 50%–6400%, Common, Arp Individual
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
Advanced
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled. Motion Seq
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied. Common
Arp: The value set in the Arpeggio Unit Multiply for the selected Part will be applied. Lane
Mod / Control
Key On Reset (Lane Motion Sequencer Key On Reset)
Determines whether or not the playback of the Motion Sequence is stopped when you play the keyboard. Part LFO
This parameter is active when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than Control Assign
“Arp” and “Lane 1.”
Receive SW
Also this parameter is not available when “Trigger” is set to “On.”
Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On Element
Each-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequence from the beginning. Osc / Tune
1st-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequencer from the beginning. If you play a Pitch EG
second note while the first is being held, the Sequence continues cycling according to the same phase as triggered
by the first note—in other words, the Sequence only resets if the first note is released before the second is played. Filter
Type
Loop (Lane Motion Sequencer Loop)
Filter EG
Determines whether the Motion Sequence is played only once or repeatedly.
This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Lane 1.” Scale
Settings: Off, On Amplitude
Level / Pan
Velocity Limit (Lane Motion Sequencer Velocity Limit)
Amp EG
Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values in which the Motion Sequence responds.
This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Lane 1.” Scale
Settings: 1–127 Element LFO
Element EQ
Cycle (Lane Motion Sequencer Cycle)
Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence. All Element
Settings: 1–16 Osc
Balance
Load Sequence
Loads Motion Sequence data in the User Memory. For details about Loading, see “Load” (page 198).

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 92

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Edit Sequence Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Calls up the Motion Sequence setting display. You can create a custom Sequence consisting of up to Common
sixteen steps.
Part Settings
Motion Seq Step Value (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Value) General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control

Motion Seq Step Type (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Type) Part LFO
Control Assign
Lane (Current Select Lane) Receive SW
Indicates the currently selected Lane. This parameter is not displayed when the corresponding Lane Element
Switch is set to off.
Settings: 1–4
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Cycle (Lane Motion Sequencer Cycle) Filter
Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.
Type
Settings: 1–16
Filter EG
Amplitude (Lane Motion Sequencer Amplitude) Scale
Determines how the entire Motion Sequence changes. Amplitude
Settings: 0–127
Level / Pan
Smooth (Lane Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Amp EG
Determines the smoothness of the time change of the Motion Sequence. Scale
Settings: 0–127
Element LFO
Sequence Select (Lane Motion Sequence Select) Element EQ
Determines the Motion Sequence Select. All Element
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For Osc
details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95).
Balance
Settings: 1–8

Polarity (Lane Motion Sequencer Polarity)

Determines the Sequence Polarity.
Copy or Exchange
Settings: Unipolar, Bipolar Elements
Unipolar: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction from a base parameter value according to the Sequence.
Bipolar: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value.

Motion Seq Step Value (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Value)

Determines the Step Value for the Motion Sequence. You can control the Step Value 1–4, 5–8, 9–12 or 13–
16 by the Control Sliders 1–4 (5–8 / 9–12 / 13–16) depending on the cursor position on the display.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 93

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Motion Seq Step Type (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Type) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Determines each Step Type of the Motion Sequence. You can switch between the Step Types A and B for Common
the Step 1–8 or 9–16 by the SCENE [1/5]–[4/8] buttons depending on the cursor position on the display.
Part Settings
Settings: A, B
General
Pulse A / Pulse B (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Type) Pitch
Determines the Curve Type of the parameter for each of “Pulse A” and “Pulse B.” “Motion Seq Step Type”
Zone Settings
described above determines which curve set here is used for each step.
Settings: For Preset Bank: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Zone Transmit
Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold Effect
For details, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Routing
For User Bank: User 1–32
When a Library file is read: Curves in Library 1–8
Ins A
Ins B
Direction (Lance Motion Sequencer Step Curve Direction) EQ
Determines the Direction of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.
Ins Assign
Settings: Forward, Reverse
Arpeggio
Prm1/Prm2 (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Parameter) Common
Adjusts the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence. Individual
This parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type. Also the range of available parameter
values differs depending on the Curve Type. Advanced
Motion Seq
Control (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Shape Control Switch) Common
Determines whether or not to control the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence by operating
Lane
Knobs. This parameter is displayed only when “MS FX” is set to on. Also this parameter is not available
depending on the Curve Type. Mod / Control
Settings: Off, On Part LFO
Control Assign
Store Sequence
Stores the edited Sequence data. For details about storing data, see “Store/Save” (page 201). Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 94

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

 Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

You can copy or exchange between Motion Sequences. Common
Part Settings
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Select Part to be copied  [Motion Seq]  [Lane]  [SHIFT]
+ [EDIT] General
or
Pitch
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Motion Control]  [Motion Seq]  Select Part to be copied  [SHIFT]
+ [EDIT] Zone Settings
or Zone Transmit
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [Motion Control]  [Knob Auto]  [SHIFT] + [EDIT]
Effect
Copy Exchange Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
1 4
Common
Individual
Advanced
2 5
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
3 6
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
NOTE You can select “All” for “Lane” and “MS Select” when copying between different Parts. Pitch EG
Filter
Copy
Touching this button activates the Motion Sequence Copy function. Type
Filter EG
Exchange
Scale
Touching this button activates the Motion Sequence Exchange function.
Amplitude
1 Part to be copied (or exchanged) Level / Pan
NOTE The currently selected Part is set automatically and this setting cannot be changed. Amp EG
Scale
2 Lane to be copied (or exchanged)
Element LFO
3 Motion Sequence Select to be copied (or exchanged) Element EQ
All Element
4 Copy (or exchange) destination Part
Osc
5 Copy (or exchange) destination Lane Balance

6 Copy (or exchange) destination Motion Sequence Select

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 95

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Mod/Control (Modulation/Control)
Common
Part Settings
Part LFO General
From the Part LFO display you can set the LFO-related parameters for the Part. Pitch
Zone Settings
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Mod/Control] 
Operation Zone Transmit
[Part LFO]
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
LFO Wave Osc / Tune
Selects the LFO waveform. Pitch EG
Settings: Triangle, Triangle+, Saw Up, Saw Down, Squ1/4, Squ1/3, Square, Squ2/3, Squ3/4, Trapezoid, S/H1, S/H2, User Filter

Tempo Sync (LFO Tempo Sync) Type

Determines whether or not the LFO is synchronized to the tempo of the Arpeggio or Song. Filter EG
Settings: Off (not synchronized), On (synchronized) Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 96

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

 When “Tempo Sync” is set to “OFF” Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Speed (LFO Speed) Common
Adjusts the speed (frequency) of LFO variation. This is not available when the Tempo Sync parameter
is set to “On.” Lane
Settings: 0–63 Mod / Control
Part LFO
Random Speed (LFO Random Speed Depth)
Control Assign
Determines the degree to which the LFO speed changes at random.
Settings: 0–127 Receive SW
Element

 When “Tempo Sync” is set to “ON” Osc / Tune

Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Tempo Speed (LFO Tempo Speed) Elements
This parameter is available only when “Tempo Sync” above has been set to “ON.” It allows you to make
detailed note value settings that determine how the LFO pulses in sync with the Arpeggio.
Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot.
(dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note
triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5
(quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the
beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight
quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 16 (sixteen quarter-notes to the beat), 1/4 x 32 (32 quarter notes to the beat),
1/4 x 64 (64 quarter notes to the beat)

MODX Reference Manual 97

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Delay (LFO Delay Time) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO Common
comes into effect.
Part Settings
Settings: 0–127
General
Fade In (LFO Fade In Time) Pitch
Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the “Delay” time has elapsed).
Zone Settings
Settings: 0–127
Zone Transmit
Hold (LFO Hold Time) Effect
Determines the length of time during which the LFO is held at its maximum level. Routing
Settings: 0–126, Hold
Ins A
Hold: No fade-out
Ins B
Fade Out (LFO Fade Out Time) EQ
Determines the time over which the LFO effect is faded out (after the “Hold” time has elapsed). Ins Assign
Settings: 0–127
Arpeggio
Key On Reset (LFO Key On Reset) Common
Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is pressed. Individual
Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On
Advanced
Each-On: The LFO resets with each note you play and starts a waveform at the phase specified by the Phase
parameter. Motion Seq
1st-On: The LFO resets with each note you play and starts a waveform at the phase specified by the Phase Common
parameter. If you play a second note while the first is being held, the LFO continues cycling according to the same
phase as triggered by the first note—in other words, the LFO only resets if the first note is released before the second Lane
is played. Mod / Control
Part LFO
Loop (LFO Loop)
Determines whether the LFO Wave plays through a single time (off) or continuously (on). Control Assign
Settings: Off, On Receive SW
Element
Phase (LFO Phase)
Osc / Tune
Determines the starting phase point for the LFO Wave when it is reset.
Settings: 0°, 90°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 270° Pitch EG
Filter
Element Phase Offset (LFO Element Phase Offset)
Type
Determines the offset values of the “Phase” parameter (above) for the respective Elements.
Filter EG
Settings: 0°, 90°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 270°
Scale
Destination (LFO Destination) Amplitude
Determines the functions which will be controlled by the LFO Wave.
Level / Pan
Settings: Insertion Effect A Parameter 1–24, Insertion Effect B Parameter 1–24, Level, Pitch, Cutoff, Resonance, Pan, E.LFO
Speed Amp EG
Scale
Depth (LFO Depth)
Element LFO
Set the LFO Wave Depth (amplitude) for “Destination” parameter (above).
Settings: 0–127 Element EQ
All Element
Element Depth Ratio (LFO Element Depth Ratio) Osc
Determines the offset values of the “Depth” parameter (above) for the respective Elements.
Balance
When set to “Off,” the LFO effect is not available. This is available only when Element-related parameters
are set in “Destination.”
Settings: Off, 0–127
Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 98

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Edit User LFO Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Calls up the User LFO Setting display. You can create a custom LFO wave consisting of up to sixteen Common
steps.
Part Settings
User LFO Step Value General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Cycle Part LFO
Selects the desired step length for the LFO. Control Assign
Settings: 2 steps, 3 steps, 4 steps, 6 steps, 8 steps, 12 steps, 16 steps
Receive SW
Slope Element
Determines the slope or ramp characteristics of the LFO wave. Osc / Tune
Settings: Off (no slope), Up, Down, Up&Down
Pitch EG
User LFO Step Value Filter
Determines the level for each step. Type
Settings: -64 – +63 Filter EG

Template Scale
This includes pre-programmed settings for creating an original LFO. Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 99

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Control Assign
Common
From the Control Assign display you can make controller assign settings for the Part. Part Settings
You can change sounds as desired by setting the desired controller to “Source” and the desired parameter
General
to “Destination.” Not only physical controllers such as the Pitch Bend wheel but also Motion Sequencer or
Envelope Follower can be set to “Source” as a virtual controller. Pitch
Up to 16 Controller Sets can be assigned to each Part. Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Mod/Control] 
Operation Effect
[Control Assign]
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Auto Select (Auto Select Switch)
Determines whether the Auto Select function for Display Filter (below) is active (On) or not (Off). When this Pitch EG
parameter is set to “On,” the operated Controller is automatically set in “Display Filter”. Also you can obtain Filter
the same result by pressing the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button. Type
Settings: Off, On
Filter EG
Display Filter Scale
Determines the Controller to be displayed. When “Super Knob” is selected, all Assignable Knob settings to Amplitude
be affected by using the Super Knob are displayed.
Level / Pan
Settings: PitchBend, ModWheel, AfterTouch, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1–8, Super Knob,
AsgnSw 1, AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst, All Amp EG
Scale
Display Name
Element LFO
Determines the name of each Assignable Knob 1–8 which is displayed in the Performance Play display
(page 27). This is available only when “AsgnKnob 1–8” is set in “Source.” Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 100

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Destination Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines the target parameter to be controlled. To add another Destination, touch “+” icon. For Common
information on setting examples for “Destination,” see below.
Part Settings
Settings: See the “Control List” in the Data List PDF document.
General
Destination Setting Examples Pitch
The following settings are some useful examples how to set the Destination.
Zone Settings
To control the volume: Part Param  Volume
Zone Transmit
To change the pitch: Part Param  Pitch
Effect
To change the speed of the Rotary Speaker: Ins A/B  InsA/B SpdCtrl *1
Routing
To apply a Wah pedal effect: Ins A/B  InsA/B PdlCtrl *2
Ins A
Concerning *1 and *2, the following settings are necessary in addition to the above settings.
Ins B
*1 “Ins A/B Type” = “Rotary Speaker” in the Effect display of Part Edit
*2 “Ins A/B Type” = “VCM Pedal Wah” in the Effect display of Part Edit EQ
Ins Assign
Source
Arpeggio
Determines the desired Controller for controlling the parameter set in “Destination.”
Settings: PitchBend, Modwheel, AfterTouch, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1–8, AsgnSw 1, Common
AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst Individual
Advanced
Element SW (Element Switch)
Selects whether the controller will affect each individual Element (On) or not (Off). This is available only Motion Seq
when Element-related parameters are set in “Destination.” Common
Settings: Off, On Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 101

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Curve Type Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines the Curve type of the parameter set in “Destination.” In the illustrations below, the vertical axis Common
indicates the operation value of the controller set in “Destination” and the horizontal axis indicates the
parameter value set in “Source.” Part Settings
Settings: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Square, Trapezoid, Tilt General
Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold, User 1–32 (when User Bank is selected), Library 1–8 (when the Library Pitch
file is read)
Zone Settings
Standard Smooth Saw
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing

Sigmoid Triangle
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign

Threshold Square
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced

Bell Trapezoid Motion Seq

Common
Lane
Mod / Control

Dogleg Tilt Sine Part LFO

Control Assign
Receive SW
Element

FM Bounce Osc / Tune

Pitch EG
Filter
Type
AM Resonance Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
M Sequence Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
Discrete Saw Hold All Element
Osc
Balance

Polarity (Curve Polarity)

Copy or Exchange
Determines the Curve Polarity of the Curve type set in “Curve Type.”
Elements
Settings: Uni, Bi
Uni: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction or in a negative direction from a base parameter value according
to the Curve shape.
Bi: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value.

Ratio (Curve Ratio)

Determines the Curve Ratio.
Settings: -64 – +63

MODX Reference Manual 102

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Param 1/Param 2 (Curve Parameter) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Adjusts the Curve shape. Common
This is not available depending on the Curve Type.
Part Settings
Destination to Name General
Copies the Parameter name from “Destination” to “Display Name.” This is available only when “Source” is Pitch
set to “AsgnKnob 1–8.”
Zone Settings
Edit Common Control Settings Zone Transmit
Calls up the Control Assign display for Common/Audio Edit. Effect
Routing
Delete
Ins A
Deletes the selected “Destination.”
Ins B
Edit User Curve EQ
Calls up the User Curve Setting display. You can select “Linear” (Curve by Linear Interpolation of eight
Ins Assign
coefficients) or “Step.”
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Curve No. (Curve Number)
Amplitude
Indicates the selected Curve Number.
Settings: 1–32 Level / Pan
Amp EG
Curve Name
Scale
Names the selected Curve. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.
Element LFO
Curve Type Element EQ
Determines the Curve Type. All Element
Settings: Linear, Step
Osc
Input Balance
Determines the Input level of the Curve. “Input 1” is fixed to “0.” “Input 8” is fixed to 127 when the Curve
Type is “Linear.”
Settings: 0–127
Copy or Exchange
Elements
Output
Determines the Output level of the Curve.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 103

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

 Selecting Controllers from a display other than Control Assign Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
While displays other than the Control Assign display are shown, you can select controllers using the Common
[CONTROL ASSIGN] button on the panel. When the cursor is on the parameter that can be set as a
Destination, the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button on the panel lights up. Press the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button Part Settings
while the button is lit, and the Destination Parameter display appears. Move the controller on the panel or General
touch a number shown on the display to select a Source. The Control Assign display then appears with the Pitch
Source selected in the Destination Parameter display set as the Source.
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Motion Sequencer Lane Envelope Follower
Receive SW
Element
NOTE An error message appears when you move the Super knob and there are no more Assignable Knobs available
for assigning a Source. Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 104

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Receive SW (Receive Switch)
Common
From the Receive Switch display you can set how each individual Part responds to various MIDI data, such Part Settings
as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to “ON,” the
General
corresponding Part responds to the appropriate MIDI data.
NOTE If CC (Receive Control Change) here is set to “OFF,” parameters related to Control Change are not available. Pitch
Zone Settings
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element [Common]  [Mod/Control] 
Operation Zone Transmit
[Receive SW]
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Pgm Change (Receive Program Change)
Osc / Tune
Determines whether Program Change messages are received or not.
Settings: Off, On Pitch EG
Filter
Bank Select (Receive Bank Select)
Type
Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Filter EG
Settings: Off, On Scale
Amplitude
Pitch Bend (Receive Pitch Bend)
Level / Pan
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Pitch Bend Wheel are received or not.
Settings: Off, On Amp EG
Scale
After Touch (Receive After Touch) Element LFO
Determines whether After Touch messages are received or not.
Element EQ
Settings: Off, On
All Element
CC (Receive Control Change) Osc
Determines whether Control Change messages are received or not.
Balance
Settings: Off, On

Vol/Exp (Receive Volume/Expression)

Determines whether volume messages are received or not. Copy or Exchange
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Elements
Settings: Off, On

Pan (Receive Pan)

Determines whether Pan messages are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 105

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MW (Receive Modulation Wheel) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel are received or not. Common
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Part Settings
Settings: Off, On
General
Sustain (Receive Sustain) Pitch
Determines whether Sustain messages are received or not.
Zone Settings
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On Zone Transmit
Effect
FC1/FC2 (Receive Foot Controller) Routing
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Controller are received or
Ins A
not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Ins B
Settings: Off, On EQ
Ins Assign
FS (Receive Foot Switch)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Switch are received or not. Arpeggio
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Common
Settings: Off, On Individual

A. SW1/A. SW2 (Receive Assignable Switch) Advanced

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are Motion Seq
received or not. Common
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Lane
Settings: Off, On
Mod / Control
MS Hold (Receive Motion Sequencer Hold) Part LFO
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button are received Control Assign
or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Receive SW
Settings: Off, On Element
Osc / Tune
MS Trigger (Receive Motion Sequencer Trigger)
Pitch EG
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button are
received or not. Filter
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Type
Settings: Off, On Filter EG

RB (Receive Ribbon Controller) Scale

Determines whether MIDI messages for Ribbon Controller are received or not. Amplitude
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Level / Pan
Settings: Off, On
Amp EG
BC (Receive Breath Controller) Scale
Determines whether MIDI messages for Breath Controller are received or not. Element LFO
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Element EQ
Settings: Off, On
All Element
A.Knob 1–8 (Receive Assignable Knob) Osc
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Assignable Knobs 1–4 (5–8) are received or Balance
not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 106

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Element Edit (Element)
Common
Osc/Tune (Oscillator/Tune) Part Settings
General
From the Oscillator/Tune display you can assign the waveform (or basic sound material) to each Element.
Pitch
You can set the note range for the Element (the range of notes on the keyboard over which the Element will
sound) as well as the velocity response (the range of note velocities within which the Element will sound). Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Osc/Tune] Effect
Routing
Element Switch
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Bank (Waveform Bank)
Filter
Number (Waveform Number)
Category (Waveform Category) Type

Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category) Filter EG

Name (Waveform Name) Scale
Indicates the information of the waveform used for the selected Element. “Bank” indicates which waveform Amplitude
location (Preset, User and Library) is assigned to the Element.
Level / Pan
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Amp EG
Element Switch Scale
Determines whether the currently selected Element is on or off. Element LFO
Settings: Off, On
Element EQ
XA Control All Element
Determines the functioning of the Expanded Articulation (XA) feature of an Element. Osc
The XA feature is sophisticated tone generator system that allows you to more effectively recreate realistic Balance
sound and natural performance techniques. It also provides other unique modes for random and alternate
sound changes as you play. For details on the XA feature, see the “Tone Generator Block” in the “Basic
Structure” on page 6.
Settings: Normal, Legato, Key Off, Cycle, Random, A.SW Off, A.SW1 On, A.SW2 On Copy or Exchange
For each Element, you can set to: Elements
Normal: The Element sounds normally each time you play the note.
Legato: When the Mono/Poly parameter is set to Mono, this Element will be played in place of the one which is set to
“Normal” of the XA Control parameter when you play the keyboard in legato fashion (playing the next note of a single-note
line or melody before releasing the previous note).
Key Off: The Element will sound each time you release the note.
Cycle (for multiple Elements): Each Element sounds alternately according to its numerical order. In other words, playing the
first note will sound Element 1, the second note Element 2, and so on.
Random (for multiple Elements): Each Element will sound randomly each time you play the note.
A.SW1 On: When the [ASSIGN 1] button is turned On, the Element will sound.
A.SW2 On: When the [ASSIGN 2] button is turned On, the Element will sound.
A.SW Off: When both the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are turned Off, the Element will sound.

MODX Reference Manual 107

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Elem Group (Element Group) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines the group for XA Control. All Elements that have the same type of XA features must have the Common
same group number. This setting does not apply when the XA Control parameters of all Elements are set to
Normal. Part Settings
Settings: 1–8 General
Pitch
Elem Connect (Element Connection Switch)
Zone Settings
Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Element. Set this to “Thru” to
bypass the Insertion Effects for the specified element. Zone Transmit
Settings: Thru, InsA, InsB Effect
Routing
New Waveform
Ins A
Loads Audio data stored in the USB flash drive as “Waveform.” For details on loading, see “Load”
(page 198). Ins B
After the Waveform is loaded, the Edit Waveform parameter (below) will be available. EQ
Ins Assign
Coarse (Coarse Tune)
Determines the pitch of each Element in semitones. Arpeggio
Settings: -48 – +48 Common
Individual
Fine (Fine Tune)
Advanced
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Element.
Settings: -64 – 63 Motion Seq
Common
Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)
Lane
Determines how the pitch of the selected Element responds to velocity.
Settings: -64 – 63
Mod / Control
Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises. Part LFO
Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls. Control Assign
0: No change in pitch.
Receive SW
Fine/Key (Pitch Fine Key Follow Sensitivity) Element
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the pitch in Osc / Tune
Fine Tuning. Pitch EG
Settings: -64 – 63
Filter
Positive values: The pitch of lower notes drops and that of higher notes rises.
Negative values: The pitch of lower notes rises and that of higher notes drops. Type
Filter EG
Random (Random Pitch Depth)
Scale
Allows you to randomly vary the pitch of the Element for each note you play. The higher the value, the
greater the pitch variation. Amplitude
Settings: 0–127 Level / Pan
Amp EG
Vel Cross Fade (Velocity Cross Fade)
Scale
Determines how gradually the volume of an Oscillator decreases in proportion to the distance of Velocity
changes outside the Velocity Limit setting. Element LFO
Settings: 0–127 Element EQ
The higher the value, the more gradually the volume decreases.
All Element
0: No sound
Osc
Tempo Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch) Balance
Determines whether or not “Key On Delay” (below) is synchronized to the tempo.
Settings: Off, On

Length (Key On Delay Time Length) Copy or Exchange

Determines the time (or elapsed delay) between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the Elements
point at which the sound is actually played. You can set different delay times for each Element. This is not
available when “Key On Delay Tempo Sync” is set to on.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 108

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Length (Key On Delay Note Length) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines the timing of “Key On Delay” when “Key On Delay Tempo Sync” is set to on. Common
Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot.
(dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note Part Settings
triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5 General
(quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the
beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter Pitch
notes to the beat) Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Velocity Limit
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will Effect
respond. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first Routing
specify the maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range Ins A
covers both “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.”
Settings: 1–127
Ins B
EQ
Note Limit Ins Assign
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element. Each Element will only
Arpeggio
sound for notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest
note, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.” Common
Settings: C -2 – G8 Individual
Advanced
Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the pitch interval of adjacent notes), assuming the pitch Motion Seq
of the Center Key (below) as standard. Common
Settings: -200% – +0% – +200% Lane
+100% (the normal setting): Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart.
Mod / Control
0%: All notes have the same pitch as the Center Key.
Negative values: The settings are reversed. Part LFO
Control Assign
Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Receive SW
Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on pitch.
Element
Settings: C -2 – G8
Osc / Tune
Edit Waveform Pitch EG
Calls up the Waveform Edit display.
Filter
From this display you can set parameters related to Key Banks consisting of the Waveform.
Type
• Key Bank Filter EG
A Key Bank is digital audio data, made by directly recording a signal, such as that of vocals or Scale
electric guitar, to this instrument.
Throughout this manual, the words “Key Bank” and “Wave” are sometimes used interchangeably; Amplitude
however, you should be careful to distinguish between “Key Bank” (raw audio data) and “Waveform” Level / Pan
(collected audio data used to make up a Part). Amp EG
Scale
• Key Bank and Waveform
Key Banks are assigned and stored to Waveforms on the MODX. Element LFO
Each of the Waveforms can contain multiple Key Banks. To assign these Key Banks to a different Element EQ
space or container, you can set the note limit and velocity limit for each Key Bank. With this setting,
All Element
the different Key Bank is played back depending on the pressed note and its velocity.
Osc
Velocity Waveform Balance
127

Key Key Bank 2 Key Bank 4

40 Waveform
Bank 1
Copy or Exchange
Key Bank 3 Key Bank 5 Elements
Key Number
D#2 A#2 G#3 F4
(Note Number)

MODX Reference Manual 109

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

• Part and Waveform Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

You can play the Waveform by assigning it to a Part then playing the keyboard with that Part. You can Common
assign the Waveform to an Element of the Part in the Element Edit for the Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
(page 107) and the Key Edit for the Drum Part Edit (page 140). Part Settings
General
Number of Key Banks Waveform Total Size
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Note Limit and Velocity Limit for each Key Bank Part LFO
Control Assign
Waveform Receive SW
Indicates the selected Waveform.
Element
Category (Waveform Main Category) Osc / Tune
Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category) Pitch EG
Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Waveform. Filter
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Type
Name (Waveform Name) Filter EG
Determines the selected Waveform. Waveform names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the Scale
parameter calls up the input character display.
Amplitude

Number of Keybank (Number of Key Bank) Level / Pan

Indicates the number of Key Banks in the selected Waveform. Amp EG
Scale
Waveform Total Size
Element LFO
Indicates the total data size of the selected Waveform.
Element EQ
Keybank (Key Bank) All Element
Indicates the selected Key Bank. Osc

Size (Key Bank Size) Balance

Indicates the data size of the selected Key Bank.

Channel (Key Bank Channel)

Copy or Exchange
Indicates the Channel (Stereo or Mono) of the selected Key Bank.
Elements

Velocity Limit
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which the selected Key Bank
will respond.
Settings: 1–127

Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for the selected Key Bank.
Settings: 1–127

MODX Reference Manual 110

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Volume Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines the output volume of the selected Key Bank. Common
Settings: 0–255
Part Settings
Pan General
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Key Bank. Pitch
Settings: L63–C–R63 Zone Settings

Tune Coarse (Coarse Tune) Zone Transmit

Determines the pitch of the selected Key Bank in semitones. Effect
Settings: -64 – +63 Routing
Ins A
Tune Fine (Fine Tune)
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of the selected Key Bank. Ins B
Settings: -64 – +63 EQ
Ins Assign
Delete Keybank (Delete Key Bank)
Arpeggio
Deletes the selected Key Bank.
Common
Add Keybank (Add Key Bank) Individual
Adds new Key Bank to the selected Waveform.
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Pitch EG Lane

From the Pitch EG display you can make all time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine how Mod / Control
the pitch of the sound changes over time for Oscillators. These can be used to control the change in pitch Part LFO
from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops. Control Assign
Receive SW
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Pitch EG]
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. Copy or Exchange
Elements
Hold Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release
Time Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time
Level Hold Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release Level

Settings: Time: 0–127

Level: -128 – +127

MODX Reference Manual 111

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Time/Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pitch EG Common
times. The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic pitch for this parameter.
Part Settings
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: High notes result in a high PEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed. General
Negative values: High notes result in a slow PEG transition speed while low notes result in a high speed. Pitch
0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note. Zone Settings

Center Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Zone Transmit
Determines how the PEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or to the strength with which the key Effect
is pressed. When the Center Key note is played, the PEG behaves according to its actual settings. Routing
Settings: C-2–G8
Ins A
Time/Vel (PEG Time Velocity Sensitivity) Ins B
Segment (PEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment) EQ
Determines the velocity sensitivity of the PEG’s Time parameters. Select the Segment, and then set its Ins Assign
“Time/Vel” parameter.
Arpeggio
Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63
Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast PEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed. Common
Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow PEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed. Individual
0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity. Advanced
Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All
Motion Seq
Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack Time.
Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 Time. Common
Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time Lane
Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release Time. Mod / Control
All: Time/Vel affects all PEG Time parameters.
Part LFO
PEG Depth Control Assign
Determines the pitch range for Pitch EG. Receive SW
Settings: -64 – +63
Element
Depth/Vel (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity) Osc / Tune
Curve (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve) Pitch EG
Determines how the pitch range will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you play Filter
notes on the keyboard. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves
Type
(graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the Pitch EG Depth. In the
illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates Pitch Change and the horizontal axis indicates Velocity. Filter EG
Settings: Depth/Vel: -64 – +63 Scale
Positive values: High Velocities cause the pitch range to expand and low Velocities cause it to contract. Amplitude
Negative values: High Velocities cause the pitch range to contract and low Velocities cause it to expand.
Level / Pan
0: The pitch envelope does not change, regardless of the Velocity.
Settings: Curve: 0–4 Amp EG
0 1 2 3 4 Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
NOTE For details on PEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 112

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Filter
Common
Part Settings
Type General
From the Type display you can make comprehensive settings for the Filter unit. The available parameters Pitch
differ depending on which Filter type is selected here. Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Filter]  [Type]
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Filter Type Osc / Tune
Determines the Filter Type for the current Element. Basically, there are four different filters: LPF (Low Pass Pitch EG
Filter), HPF (High Pass Filter), BPF (Band Pass Filter) and BEF (Band Elimination Filter). For details on
Filter
settings, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Settings: LPF24D, LPF24A, LPF18, LPF18s, LPF12+HPF12, LPF6+HPF12, HPF24D, HPF12, BPF12D, BPFw, BPF6, BEF12, Type
BEF6, DualLPF, DualHPF, DualBPF, DualBEF, LPF12+BPF6, Thru Filter EG
LPF Scale
Resonance Amplitude
Gain Gain Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Frequency Cutoff Frequency Element EQ
Frequencies that are Cutoff
“passed” by the filter Frequency Frequency
All Element
LPF24D: A dynamic -24 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter with a characteristic digital sound. Compared to the LPF24A type, Osc
this filter can produce a more pronounced Resonance effect.
Balance

Gain Resonance

Copy or Exchange
Elements
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter

Frequency

LPF24A: A digital dynamic Low-Pass Filter with characteristics similar to a 4-pole analog synthesizer filter.
LPF18: 3-pole -18 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter.
LPF18s: 3-pole -18 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter. This filter has a smoother cutoff slope than the LPF18 type.

MODX Reference Manual 113

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

HPF Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Gain Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Common
Resonance
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Frequency Zone Settings
Cutoff Frequency
Zone Transmit

LPF12+HPF12: A combination of a -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filter connected in serial. Effect
When this Filter Type is selected, HPF Cutoff and HPF Key Follow Sensitivity can be set Routing
LPF6+HPF12: A combination of a -6 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filter connected in serial.
Ins A
When this Filter Type is selected, HPF Cutoff and HPF Key Follow Sensitivity can be set.
HPF24D: A dynamic -24 dB/oct High-Pass Filter with a characteristic digital sound. This filter can produce a Ins B
pronounced Resonance effect. EQ
Gain Resonance Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Frequencies that are “passed”
by the filter Individual
Advanced
Frequency
Motion Seq
HPF12: -12 dB/oct dynamic High-Pass Filter. Common

BPF Lane
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Mod / Control
Gain
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Frequency
Center Frequency Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
BPF12D: The combination of a -12 dB/oct HPF and LPF with a characteristic digital sound.
Filter
Resonance
Gain Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Frequency Level / Pan
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Amp EG
BPFw: A -12 dB/oct BPF that combines HPF and LPF filters to allow wider bandwidth settings. Scale
Element LFO
Gain
Element EQ
Width All Element
Osc
Frequency
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Balance

BPF6: The combination of a -6 dB/oct HPF and LPF.

Resonance
Gain Copy or Exchange
Elements

Frequency
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter

MODX Reference Manual 114

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

BEF Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Gain Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Frequency
Center Frequency Zone Transmit
Effect
BEF12: -12 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filter.
BEF6: -6 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filter. Routing
Ins A
DualLPF: Two -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filters connected in parallel. You can edit the distance between the two Cutoff
Frequencies. Ins B

Gain Distance EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Frequency Individual
Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display
(and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set)
Advanced
Motion Seq
DualHPF: Two -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filters connected in parallel.
Common
DualBPF: Two -6 dB/oct Band-Pass Filters connected in parallel.
Lane
DualBEF: Two -6 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filters connected in serial.
Distance Mod / Control
Gain
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Frequency Element
Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display
(and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set) Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
LPF12+BPF6: A combination of a -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -6 dB/oct Band-Pass Filter connected in
Filter
parallel. You can edit the distance between the two Cutoff Frequencies.
Type
Gain
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Distance Frequency Level / Pan
Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display Amp EG
(and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set)
Scale

Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency) Element LFO

Determines the cutoff frequency for the Filter. This is used as the basic frequency for the selected Filter Element EQ
Type. All Element
Settings: 0–255
Osc
Cutoff/Vel (Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity) Balance
Determines how the Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity, or the strength with which you play notes.
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the Cutoff Frequency rises.
Copy or Exchange
Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the Cutoff Frequency rises.
Elements
0: The Cutoff Frequency does not change, regardless of the Velocity.

MODX Reference Manual 115

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Resonance Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Width Common
This parameter’s function varies according to the selected Filter Type. If the selected filter is an LPF, HPF,
Part Settings
BPF (excluding BPFw), or BEF, this parameter is used to set the Resonance. For the BPFw, it is used to
adjust the frequency bandwidth. This parameter is used to set the amount of Resonance (harmonic General
emphasis) applied to the signal at the cutoff frequency. This can be used in combination with the “Cutoff” Pitch
parameter to add further character to the sound. For the BPFw, this parameter is used to adjust the width Zone Settings
of the band of signal frequencies passed by the filter.
This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Types. Zone Transmit
Settings: 0–127 Effect
Routing
Cutoff/Key (Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity)
Ins A
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Cutoff
Frequency (above). The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic Cutoff Frequency for this Ins B
parameter. EQ
Settings: - 200% – +200%
Ins Assign
Positive values: The Cutoff Frequency drops for lower notes and rises for higher notes.
Negative values: The Cutoff Frequency rises for lower notes and drops for higher notes.
Arpeggio
Common
Center Key (Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Individual
This indicates that the central note for “Cutoff/Key” above is C3. Keep in mind that this is for display
Advanced
purposes only; the value cannot be changed.
Motion Seq
Gain Common
Sets the Gain (the amount of boost applied to the signal sent to the Filter Unit). Lane

 In case of the Filter Type with “Distance” and “Res/Vel” parameters Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Distance
Balance
Determines the distance between the Cutoff Frequencies for the Dual Filter types and the LPF12+BPF6
filter. This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Type.
Settings: -128 – +127
Copy or Exchange
Res/Vel (Resonance Velocity Sensitivity) Elements
Determines the degree to which Resonance responds to Velocity, or the strength with which you play
notes. This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Type.
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: The higher the Velocity, the greater the Resonance.
Negative values: The lower the Velocity, the greater the Resonance.
0: No change of the Resonance value.

MODX Reference Manual 116

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

 In case of the Filter Type with “HPF Cutoff” and “HPF Cutoff/Key” parameters Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq

HPF Cutoff (High Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency) Common

Determines the central frequency for the Key Follow parameter (below) of the HPF. This parameter is Lane
available only when one of the filter types “LPF12+HPF12” or “LPF6+HPF12” is selected. Mod / Control
Settings: 0–255
Part LFO
HPF Cutoff/Key (High Pass Filter Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity) Control Assign
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or Octave Range) affect the Cutoff Receive SW
Frequency of the HPF. This parameter is available only when one of the filter types “LPF12+HPF12” or Element
“LPF6+HPF12” is selected.
Osc / Tune
Settings: -200% – +200%
Positive values: The Cutoff Frequency drops for lower notes and rises for higher notes. Pitch EG
Negative values: The Cutoff Frequency rises for lower notes and drops for higher notes. Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 117

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Filter EG
Common
From the Filter EG display you can make all time and level settings for the Filter EG, which determine how Part Settings
the sound changes over time for Elements. These can be used to control the change the sound from the
General
moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops.
Pitch
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Filter]  [Filter EG] Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Element
Hold Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release Osc / Tune
Time Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time Pitch EG
Level Hold Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release Level Filter
Type
Settings: Time: 0–127
Level: -128 – +127 Filter EG
Scale
Time/Key (FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)
Amplitude
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Filter EG
Times. The basic speed of change for the FEG is at the note specified in Center Key (below). Level / Pan
Settings: -64 – +63 Amp EG
Positive values: High notes result in a high FEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed. Scale
Negative values: High notes result in a slow FEG transition speed while low notes result in a high speed.
Element LFO
0: The FEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.
Element EQ
Center Key (FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) All Element
Determines the central note for the “Time/Key” parameter above. Osc
Settings: C-2–G8
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 118

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Time/Vel (FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Segment (FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment) Common
Determines how the FEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or the strength with which the key is
Part Settings
pressed. Select the “Segment,” and then set its “Time/Vel” parameter.
Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63 General
Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast FEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed. Pitch
Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow FEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed. Zone Settings
0: The pitch transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity.
Zone Transmit
Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All
Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack time. Effect
Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 time. Routing
Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time. Ins A
Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release time.
Ins B
All: Time/Vel affects all FEG Time parameters.
EQ
FEG Depth Ins Assign
Determines the Cutoff Frequency range for Filter EG. Arpeggio
Settings: -64 – +63
Common
Depth/Vel (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity) Individual
Curve (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve) Advanced
Determines how the range of the Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity (strength) with which you play Motion Seq
notes on the keyboard. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves
(graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the Filter EG Depth. In the Common
illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates Cutoff Frequency Change and the horizontal axis indicates Lane
Velocity. Mod / Control
Settings: Depth/Vel: -64 – +63
Part LFO
Settings: Curve: 0–4
Control Assign
0 1 2 3 4
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
NOTE For details on FEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 119

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Scale (Filter Scale)
Common
From the Filter Scale display you can set parameters related to Filter Scale for Elements. Part Settings
“Filter Scale” controls the Filter Cutoff Frequency according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard.
General

Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Filter]  [Scale] Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Break Point 1–4 Receive SW
Determines the four Break Points by specifying the respective note numbers. Element
Settings: C -2 – G8
Osc / Tune
NOTE Break Points 1 to 4 will be automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard.
Pitch EG
Cutoff Offset 1–4 Filter
Determines the offset value to the Cutoff Frequency at each Break Point. Type
Settings: -128 – +127
Filter EG
NOTE Regardless of the size of these Offsets, the minimum and maximum Cutoff limits (values of 0 and 127,
respectively) cannot be exceeded. Scale
NOTE Any note played below the Break Point 1 note results in the Break Point 1 Level setting. Likewise, any note Amplitude
played above the Break Point 4 note results in the Break Point 4 Level setting.
Level / Pan
NOTE For information on setting examples for Filter Scaling, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 120

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Amplitude
Common
Part Settings
Level/Pan General
From the Level/Pan display you can make Level and Pan settings for each individual Element. Pitch
Zone Settings
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Amplitude] 
Operation Zone Transmit
[Level/Pan]
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Level Osc / Tune
Determines the output level of the Element.
Pitch EG
Settings: 0–127
Filter
Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity) Type
Offset (Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset) Filter EG
Curve (Level Velocity Sensitivity Curve) Scale
Determines how the actual Velocity will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you
Amplitude
play notes on the keyboard. The Offset parameter raises or lowers the level specified by the “Level/Vel.”
If the result is higher than 127, the velocity is set to 127. The Curve parameter lets you select from five Level / Pan
different preset velocity curves (graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the Amp EG
actual Velocity. In the illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates the actual resulting Velocity and the
Scale
horizontal axis indicates Velocity with which you play notes.
Settings: Level/Vel: -64 – +63 Element LFO
Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises. Element EQ
Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises. All Element
0: The output level does not change.
Osc
Settings: Offset: 0–127
Balance
Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 0 Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 64 Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 96
Y Y Y
A A A
127 127 127
B
B
B C Copy or Exchange
C
C Elements

X X X
0 64 127 0 64 127 0 64 127

A: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 0

B: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 32
C: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 64
X: Velocity with which you play a note
Y: Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator)

MODX Reference Manual 121

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Settings: Curve: 0–4 Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

0 1 2 3 4
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Pan (Element Pan)
Zone Settings
Determines the stereo Pan position for the selected Element.
Settings: L63–C (center)–R63
Zone Transmit
Effect
Alternate Pan Routing
Determines the amount by which the sound is panned alternately left and right for each note you press.
Ins A
The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position.
Settings: L64–C–R63 Ins B
EQ
Random Pan
Ins Assign
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Element is panned randomly left and right for
each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the Center Pan position. Arpeggio
Settings: 0–127 Common
Individual
Scaling Pan
Advanced
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pan
position, left and right, of the selected Element. At note C3, the main Pan setting (above) is used for the Motion Seq
basic Pan position. Common
Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 Lane
Positive values: Moves the pan position to the left for lower notes and to the right for higher notes.
Mod / Control
Negative values: Moves the pan position to the right for lower notes and to the left for higher notes.
Part LFO
Level/Key (Level Key Follow Sensitivity) Control Assign
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the volume of
Receive SW
the selected Element. A Center Key setting of C3 is used as the basic setting.
Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 Element
Positive values: Lowers the output level for lower notes and raises it for higher notes. Osc / Tune
Negative values: Raises the output level for lower notes and lowers it for higher notes. Pitch EG

Center Key (Level Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Filter

This indicates that the central note for “Level/Key” above is C3. Keep in mind that this is for display Type
purposes only; the value cannot be changed. Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 122

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Amp EG (Amplitude EG)
Common
From the Amplitude EG display you can make all the time and level settings for the Amplitude EG, which Part Settings
determine how the volume of the sound changes over time. Using the AEG, you can control the transition
General
in volume from the moment the sound starts is to the moment the sound stops.
Pitch
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Amplitude]  Zone Settings
Operation
[Amp EG]
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. Element
Osc / Tune
Initial Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release
Pitch EG
Time – Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time
Filter
Level Initial Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level –
Type
Settings: Time: 0–127
Filter EG
Level: 0–127
Scale
Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) Amplitude
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Amplitude Level / Pan
EG Times. The Center Key parameter (below) is used as the basic amplitude for this parameter.
Amp EG
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: High notes result in a fast Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed. Scale
Negative values: High notes result in a slow Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a fast speed. Element LFO
0: The Amplitude EG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note. Element EQ

Center Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) All Element
Determines the central note for the “Time/Key” parameter above. When the Center Key note is played, the Osc
AEG behaves according to its actual settings. Balance
Settings: C-2–G8

Release Adj (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key Release Adjustment)
Determines the sensitivity of AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity to AEG Release. The lower the value, the Copy or Exchange
lower the sensitivity. Elements
Settings: 0–127
127: Sets the AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity to the value of Decay 1 or Decay 2.
0: Produces no effect in the AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity.

MODX Reference Manual 123

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Time/Vel (AEG Time Velocity Sensitivity) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Segment (AEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment) Common
Determines how the AEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or the strength with which the key is
Part Settings
pressed. Select the “Segment,” and then set its “Time/Vel” parameter.
Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63 General
Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast AEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed. Pitch
Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow AEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed. Zone Settings
0: The amplitude transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity.
Zone Transmit
Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All
Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack Time. Effect
Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 Time. Routing
Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time. Ins A
Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release Time.
Ins B
All: Time/Vel affects all AEG Time parameters.
EQ
Half Damper (Half Damper Switch) Ins Assign
When the Half Damper Switch is set to on, you can produce a “half-pedal” effect just as on a real acoustic Arpeggio
piano by using the optional FC3 Foot Controller connected to the FOOT SWITCH [SUSTAIN] jack on the
rear panel. Common
Settings: off, on Individual
Advanced
Time (Half Damper Time)
Motion Seq
Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released while holding down the Foot
Controller FC3 with the Half Damper Switch parameter turned on. This is not available when the Half Common
Damper Switch is set to off. Lane
Settings: 0–127
Mod / Control
NOTE For details on AEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 124

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Scale (Amplitude Scale)
Common
From the Amplitude Scale display you can make Amplitude Scale settings for each Element. Part Settings
Amplitude Scale function controls the Amplitude output level according to the positions of the notes on the
General
keyboard.
Pitch
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Amplitude]  [Scale] Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Break Point 1–4 Element
Determines the four Amplitude Scale Break Points by specifying their respective note numbers.
Osc / Tune
Settings: C -2 – G8
NOTE Break Points 1 to 4 will be automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard. Pitch EG
Filter
Level Offset 1–4 Type
Determines the offset value of the level of each Amplitude Scale Break Point.
Filter EG
Settings: -128 – +127
NOTE For details on setting examples of the Amplitude Scaling, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF Scale
document. Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 125

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Element LFO
Common
From the Element LFO display you can make LFO related setting for each Element. Part Settings
The Low-Frequency Oscillator (LFO) unit of the Element generates a low frequency signal. The signal from General
the LFO can be used to modulate the pitch, filter, and amplitude.
Pitch
Zone Settings
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Element LFO]
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
LFO Wave Element
Selects the LFO waveform that is used to vary the sound. Osc / Tune
Settings: Saw, Triangle, Square
Pitch EG
Saw (Sawtooth wave) Triangle (Triangle wave) Square (Square wave)
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Speed (LFO Speed)
Adjusts the speed (frequency) of LFO variation. The larger the setting, the faster the speed. Level / Pan
Settings: 0–63 Amp EG
Scale
Key On Reset (LFO Key On Reset)
Element LFO
Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is played.
Settings: Off, On Element EQ
Off On All Element
Osc
Balance
Time Time

Key on Key on
Copy or Exchange
Delay (LFO Delay Time) Elements
Determines the delay time between the moment that a Note On message is received and the moment the
LFO comes into effect.
Settings: 0–127

Fade In (LFO Fade In Time)

Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the “Delay” time has elapsed).
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 126

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Pitch Mod (LFO Pitch Modulation Depth) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound. Common
Settings: 0–127
Part Settings
Filter Mod (LFO Filter Modulation Depth) General
Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff frequency. Pitch
Settings: 0–127 Zone Settings

Amp Mod (LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth) Zone Transmit

Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude or volume of Effect
the sound. Routing
Settings: 0–127
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Element EQ Ins Assign

From the Element EQ display you can make EQ related settings for each Element. Arpeggio
Common
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Element EQ] Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
EQ Type (Element EQ Type) Scale
Determines the Equalizer Type. Element LFO
Settings: 2-band, P.EQ (Parametric EQ), Boost6 (boost 6dB), Boost12 (boost 12dB), Boost18 (boost 18dB), Thru
Element EQ
2-band: This is a “shelving” equalizer, which combines separate high and low frequency bands.
P.EQ: The Parametric EQ is used to attenuate or boost signal levels (gain) around the Frequency. All Element
Boost6, Boost12, Boost18: These can be used to boost the level of the entire signal by 6dB, 12dB and 18dB, Osc
respectively
Balance
Thru: This setting bypasses the equalizers leaving the entire signal unaffected.

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 127

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

 When “EQ Type” is set to “2-band” Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Low Freq Common

Settings: 50.1Hz–2.00kHz Part Settings
Gain
High Freq
Settings: 139.7Hz–12.9kHz General
+
Pitch
Zone Settings
0 Frequency
Zone Transmit
Effect
–
Low Gain High Gain Routing
Settings: -12dB – +12dB Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
EQ Low Gain (Element EQ Low Gain) Filter
Determines the level gain of the Low band. Type
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Filter EG
EQ Hi Gain (Element EQ High Gain) Scale
Determines the level gain of the High band. Amplitude
Settings: -12dB – +12dB Level / Pan

EQ Low Freq (Element EQ Low Frequency) Amp EG

Determines the frequency for the Low band. Scale
Settings: 50.1Hz–2.00kHz Element LFO
Element EQ
EQ Hi Freq (Element EQ High Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the High band. All Element
Settings: 139.7Hz–12.9kHz Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 128

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

 When “EQ Type” is set to “P.EQ” Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Gain Common
Q Part Settings
+ Settings: 0.7–10.3
General

Frequency Pitch
0
Zone Settings
Gain
– Settings: -12dB – +12dB Zone Transmit

Freq Effect
Settings: 139.7H–12.9kHz Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
EQ Gain (Element EQ Gain)
Determines the level gain of the frequency set in “EQ Freq.” Filter
Settings: -12dB – +12dB Type
Filter EG
EQ Freq (Element EQ Frequency)
Scale
Determines the frequency to be attenuated/boosted.
Settings: 139.7Hz–12.9kHz Amplitude
Level / Pan
EQ Q (Element EQ Q)
Amp EG
This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics.
Scale
Settings: 0.7–10.3
NOTE For details on EQ structure, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 129

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Element All (All Element)
Common
Part Settings
Osc (Oscillator) General
From the Oscillator display you can set Oscillator-related parameters for the eight Elements. Pitch
Zone Settings
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  [All]  [Osc] Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
SW (Element Switch) Osc / Tune
Determines whether each Element is active or not.
Pitch EG
Settings: Off, On
Filter
XA Control Type
Determines the functioning of the Expanded Articulation (XA) feature of an Element.
Filter EG
The XA feature is sophisticated tone generator system that allows you to more effectively recreate realistic
sound and natural performance techniques. It also provides other unique modes for random and alternate Scale
sound changes as you play. For details on the XA feature, see the “Tone Generator Block” in the “Basic Amplitude
Structure” on page 6. Level / Pan
Settings: Normal, Legato, Key Off, Cycle, Random, A.SW1 On (Assignable Switch 1 ON), A.SW2 On (Assignable Switch 2
ON), A.SW Off (Assignable Switch 1 OFF) Amp EG
Normal: The Element sounds normally each time you play the note. Scale
Legato: When the Mono/Poly parameter is set to Mono, this Element will be played in place of the one which is set to Element LFO
“Normal” of the XA Control parameter when you play the keyboard in legato fashion (playing the next note of a
single-note line or melody before releasing the previous note). Element EQ
Key Off: The Element will sound each time you release the note. All Element
Cycle: Each Element sounds alternately according to its numerical order. In other words, playing the first note will
Osc
sound Element 1, the second note Element 2, and so on.
Random: Each Element will sound randomly each time you play the note. Balance
A.SW1 On: When the [ASSIGN 1] button is turned On, the Element will sound.
A.SW2 On: When the [ASSIGN 2] button is turned On, the Element will sound.
A.SW Off: When both of the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are turned Off, the Element will sound.
Copy or Exchange
Group (Element Group) Elements
Determines the group for XA Control. All Elements that have the same type of XA features must have the
same group number. This setting does not apply when the XA Control parameters of all Elements are set to
Normal.
Settings: 1–8

Waveform (Waveform Name)

Indicates the Waveform Name for each Element.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

MODX Reference Manual 130

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Velocity Limit Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will Common
respond. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first
specify the maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range Part Settings
covers both “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.” General
Settings: 1–127 Pitch
Zone Settings
Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element. Each Element will only Zone Transmit
sound for notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest Effect
note, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.” Routing
Settings: C -2 – G8
Ins A
Ins B
Balance EQ
Ins Assign
From the Balance display you can set parameters related to Level, Pitch, and Pan for the eight Elements.
Arpeggio
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  [All]  [Balance] Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
SW (Element Switch) Level / Pan
Determines whether each Element is active or not. Amp EG
Settings: Off, On Scale

Coarse (Coarse Tune) Element LFO

Determines the pitch of each Element in semitones. Element EQ
Settings: -48 – +48 All Element
Osc
Fine (Fine Tune)
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Element. Balance
Settings: -64 – +63

Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency)

Copy or Exchange
Determines the Cutoff Frequency for each Element.
Elements
Settings: 0–255

Pan (Element Pan)

Determines the stereo pan position for each Element.
Settings: L63 (far left)–C (center)–R63 (far right)

Level
Determines the level of each Element.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 131

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

 Copying or Exchanging Elements Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

You can copy or exchange between Elements. Common
Part Settings
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Select Element to be copied  [SHIFT] + [EDIT]
General
Copy Exchange Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
1 3 Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
2 4 Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO

NOTE Copying or exchanging between different Part types (for example, between Elements and Operators) cannot be Control Assign
executed. Receive SW
Element
Copy
Touching this button activates the Copy function between Elements. Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Exchange Filter
Touching this button activates the Exchange function between Elements
Type
1 Part to be copied (or exchanged) Filter EG
NOTE The currently selected Part is set automatically and this setting cannot be changed. Scale
Amplitude
2 Element to be copied (or exchanged)
Level / Pan
3 Copy (or exchange) destination Part Amp EG
Scale
4 Copy (or exchange) destination Element
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance

Copy or Exchange
Elements

MODX Reference Manual 132

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Drum Part Edit

Drum Part Edit
Common
Each Drum Part can consist of up to 73 Drum Keys, assigned to notes spread across the keyboard (C0 to Part Settings
C6). There are two types of Drum Part Edit displays: Key Common Edit display, for editing the settings that
apply to all Drum keys; and Key Edit display, for editing individual keys. This section explains the General
parameters for Key Common Edit and Key Edit. Zone Settings
Zone Transmit

Key Common Edit (Common) Effect

Routing
Part Settings Ins A
Ins B
EQ
General
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Drum Key [Common]  [Part Settings] 
Operation Common
[General]
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ

Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys

Part Category Main (Part Main Category)

Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category)
Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Part.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Part Name
Determines the Part name of the selected Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the
parameter calls up the input character display.

Volume (Part Volume)

Determines the output level of the selected Part.
Settings: 0–127

Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.
Settings: L63–C–R63

Dry Level
Determines the dry sound level (not effect applied) of the selected Part. This is available only when “Part
Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.”
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 133

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Var Send (Variation Send) Drum Part Edit

Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Common
Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.”
Part Settings
Settings: 0–127
General
Rev Send (Reverb Send) Zone Settings
Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part
Zone Transmit
Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.”
Settings: 0–127 Effect
Routing
Part Output (Part Output Select) Ins A
Determines which audio output is used for the selected Part.
Ins B
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8, Off, Drum
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. EQ
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Ins Assign
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Arpeggio
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Common
Drum: “Drum Key Out” is displayed to determine the specific output for each Drum Key.
Individual
Note Shift Advanced
Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for each Part in semitones.
Motion Seq
Settings: -24 – +0 – +24
Common
Detune Lane
Determines the pitch settings of the selected Part in 0.1 Hz increments. Mod / Control
Settings: -12.8Hz – +0.0Hz – +12.7Hz
Control Assign
Pitch Bend / (Pitch Bend Range Upper/Lower) Receive SW
Determines the maximum Pitch Bend Range in semitones. Key
Settings: -48 – +0 – +24 Osc / Tune

Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only) Filter

Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this Level / Pan
parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block. Element EQ
Settings: Off, On

Element Pan (Element Pan Switch)

Determines whether the individual pan settings for each Key Part (made via [EDIT]  Part selection  Copying or Exchanging
Drum Key selection  [Level/Pan]  “Pan”) are applied or not. When this is set to “off,” the pan position Drum Keys
for the each Key is set to center in the Part.
Settings: Off, On

Velocity Limit
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond.
Settings: 1–127

Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part.
Settings: C -2 – G8

MODX Reference Manual 134

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Velocity Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) Drum Part Edit

Determines the degree to which the resulting volume of the tone generator responds to your playing Common
strength. The higher the value, the more the volume changes in response to your playing strength (as
shown below). Part Settings
Settings: 0–127 General
When Offset (below) is set to 64: Zone Settings
Depth=127 Depth=64
127 Zone Transmit
Actual resulting Effect
velocity
(affecting the Routing
Depth=32
tone generator)
Ins A

Depth=0 Ins B
0 127 EQ
Velocity with which you play a note
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Velocity Offset (Velocity Sensitivity Offset)
Determines the amount by which played velocities are adjusted for the actual resulting velocity effect. This Common
lets you raise or lower all velocities based on this setting value—allowing you to automatically compensate Individual
for playing too strongly or too softly. Advanced
Settings: 0–127
Motion Seq
When Depth (above) = 64 When Depth (above) = 64 When Depth (above) = 64 Common
and Offset = 32 and Offset = 64 and Offset = 96
Lane
127 127 127
Actual Actual Actual Mod / Control
resulting resulting resulting Control Assign
velocity velocity velocity
(affecting (affecting (affecting Receive SW
the tone the tone the tone
generator) generator) generator) Key
0 64 127 0 64 127 0 64 127 Osc / Tune
Velocity with which you play a note Velocity with which you play a note Velocity with which you play a note Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Zone Settings
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 71).
Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
Zone Transmit
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 73).

MODX Reference Manual 135

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Drum Part Edit

Effect
Common
Part Settings
Routing General
Zone Settings
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Drum Key [Common]  [Effect]  [Routing] Zone Transmit
Effect
Drum Key Connection Switch Insertion FX Switch
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Insertion FX Switch
Level / Pan
Drum Key Connection Switch Element EQ
Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Drum Key, and which is
bypassed (Thru).
When the “Keyboard Select” is on, you can select Keys by playing the notes on the keyboard.
Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B) Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
Insertion FX Switch
Determines whether or not Insertion Effect A / Insertion Effect B is active or not.
Settings: Off, On

Category (Effect Category)

Type (Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Performances, see the Data List PDF document.

Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)

Determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. This is not available depending on the selected
Effect Type. For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display (page 76) of the Normal Part
(AWM2).
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off

MODX Reference Manual 136

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type) Drum Part Edit

Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. Common
Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA
Part Settings
RevSend (Reverb Send) General
VarSend (Variation Send) Zone Settings
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Zone Transmit
Reverb/Variation effect. This is active only when the Part Output/Drum Key Output is set to “MainL&R.”
Effect
Settings: 0–127
Routing
Part Output (Part Output Select) Ins A
Determines the specific output for the audio signal. Ins B
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8, Off, Drum
EQ
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Ins Assign
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Arpeggio
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Common
Drum: “Drum Key Out” is displayed to determine the specific output for each Drum Key.
Individual
Envelope Follower Advanced
Calls up the Envelope Follower Setting display. Motion Seq
Refer to the Routing display (page 76) for Normal Parts (AWM2).
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ

Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys

InsRev (Insertion Reverb Send)

InsVar (Insertion Variation Send)
Determines the Send level for the entire Drum Part (all keys), sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb/
Variation effect.
This is active only when the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “InsA” or “InsB” and the Part Output/
Drum Key Output is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 137

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Drum Part Edit

Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
KeyRev (Drum Key Reverb Send) Common
KeyVar (Drum Key Variation Send) Lane
Determines the Send level for each Drum Key, sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb/Variation effect.
This is active only when the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “Thru” and the Part Output/Drum Key Mod / Control
Output is set to “MainL&R.” Control Assign
Settings: 0–127 Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ

Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys

Drum Key Out (Drum Key Output Select)

Determines the specific output for the individual Drum Key.
This is displayed only when the Part Output is set to “Drum.”
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
NOTE When the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “InsA” or “InsB,” this parameter is fixed to “MainL&R.”

MODX Reference Manual 138

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Drum Part Edit

Ins A (Insertion Effect A)
Common
Ins B (Insertion Effect B)
Part Settings
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 77). General
Zone Settings
EQ (Part Equalizer)
Zone Transmit
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 78). Effect
Routing
Ins Assign (Insertion Assign) Ins A
Ins B
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 81).
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio Arpeggio
Common

Common Individual
Advanced
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 82). Motion Seq
Common
Individual
Lane
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 85). Mod / Control
Control Assign
Advanced Receive SW
Key
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 87), except for the
additional parameter below. Osc / Tune
Filter
Fixed SD/BD
Level / Pan
When this parameter is set to On, C1 will be used as the note of the Bass Drum and D1 will be used as the
note of the Snare Drum in Arpeggio playback. Element EQ
Settings: Off, On

Copying or Exchanging
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer) Drum Keys

Common
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 88).

Lane
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 91).

Mod/Control (Modulation/Control)

Control Assign
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 100), except for the
different setting values in the Destination parameter. For the setting value for “Destination,” see the “Control
List” in the Data List PDF document.

Receive SW (Receive Switch)

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 105).

MODX Reference Manual 139

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Drum Part Edit

Key Edit (Key)
Common
Part Settings
Osc/Tune (Oscillator/Tune) General
From the Oscillator/Tune display you can set Oscillator-related parameters for each Key of the Drum Part. Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Key selection  [Osc/Tune] Effect
Routing
Drum Key Switch
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Bank (Waveform Bank)
Element EQ
Number (Waveform Number)
Category (Waveform Category)
Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category)
Name (Waveform Name) Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
Indicates the information of the waveform used for the selected Drum Key. “Bank” indicates which
waveform location (Preset, User and Library) is assigned to the Key.
Settings: Refer to the Data List PDF document.

Drum Key Switch

Determines whether the currently selected Drum Key is used or not.
Settings: Off, On

Assign Mode (Key Assign Mode)

Determines the playing method when the same notes are received continuously, and without
corresponding note off messages.
Settings: Single, Multi
Single: Double or repeated playback of the same note is not possible. The first note will be stopped, then the next
note will be sounded.
Multi: All notes are sounded simultaneously. This allows playback of the same note when it is played multiple times
in succession (especially for tambourine and cymbal sounds that you would want to ring out to their full decay).

Connect (Drum Key Connection Switch)

Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Drum Key. The Insertion
Effect is bypassed if “Thru” is selected. This parameter is same as the “Connect” parameter in the
“Routing” display of Effect settings in Key Common Edit. Making a setting here automatically changes the
setting of that parameter as well.
Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B)

MODX Reference Manual 140

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

New Waveform Drum Part Edit

Loads Audio data stored in the USB flash drive as “Waveform.” For details on loading, see “Load” Common
(page 198).
After the Waveform is loaded, the Edit Waveform parameter will be available. For details on “Edit Part Settings
Waveform,” see page 109. General
Zone Settings
Coarse (Coarse Tune)
Zone Transmit
Determines the pitch of each Drum Key Wave in semitones.
Settings: -48 – +48 Effect
Routing
Fine (Fine Tune) Ins A
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Drum Key Wave.
Ins B
Settings: -64 – 63
EQ
Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity) Ins Assign
Determines how the pitch of the selected Drum key responds to velocity.
Arpeggio
Settings: -64 – 63
Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.
Common
Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls. Individual
0: No change in pitch. Advanced
Motion Seq
Rcv Note Off (Receive Note Off)
Select whether MIDI Note Off messages are received by each Drum Key. Common
Settings: off, on Lane
Mod / Control
Group (Alternate Group)
Control Assign
Set the Alternate Group to which the key is assigned. The Parts to which the same number is assigned
here cannot sound simultaneously. This setting helps to reproduce the sounds of a real drum kit, in which Receive SW
some drum sounds cannot physically be played simultaneously, such as open and closed hi-hats. Key
Settings: off, 1–127
Osc / Tune
KeyRev (Drum Key Reverb Send) Filter
KeyVar (Drum Key Variation Send) Level / Pan
Determines the level of the Drum key sound (the bypassed signal) that is sent to Reverb/Variation effect. Element EQ
This is not available depending on the setting of the Drum Key Connection Switch.
Settings: 0–127

Drum Key Out (Drum Key Output Select) Copying or Exchanging

Determines the specific output for the individual Drum Key. Drum Keys
This is not available depending on the settings of Drum Key Connection Switch or Part Output.
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

Keyboard Select (Keyboard Select Switch)

Determines whether or not the Keyboard Select setting is active or not. When this is set to on, you can
select Drum Keys by playing the notes on the keyboard.
Settings: Off, On

Drum Key
Indicates the selected Drum key.
Settings: C0–C6

MODX Reference Manual 141

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Drum Part Edit

Filter
Common
From the Filter display you can apply filter settings to the Drum Part. These let you apply a low pass filter Part Settings
and high pass filter to each individual Drum key. General
Zone Settings
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Key selection  [Filter]
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Cutoff (Low Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency)
Use this parameter to set the cutoff frequency for the low-pass filter. Filter
Settings: 0–255 Level / Pan
Element EQ
Cutoff/Vel (Low Pass Filter Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity)
Set the velocity sensitivity of the Low Pass Filter Cutoff frequency. Positive settings will cause the Cutoff
Frequency to rise the harder you play the keyboard. A negative setting will have the opposite effect.
Settings: -64 – +63 Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
Resonance (Low Pass Filter Resonance)
Determines the amount of Resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the Cutoff Frequency.
Settings: 0–127

HPF Cutoff (High Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency)

Determines the Cutoff frequency of the High Pass Filter.
Settings: 0–255

MODX Reference Manual 142

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Drum Part Edit

Level/Pan
Common
From the Level/Pan display you can make Level and Pan settings for each Drum Key. Part Settings
General
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Key selection  [Level/Pan] Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Osc / Tune
Attack Decay1 Decay2 Filter
Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Level / Pan
Level – Decay1 Level – Element EQ

Settings: Time: 0–127, Hold (only for Decay2)

Level: 0–127
Copying or Exchanging
Decay2 Time = 0–126 Decay2 Time = Hold Drum Keys
Attack level Attack level
Level Level
Decay1 level Decay1 level

Time Time
Attack Decay1 Decay2 Attack Decay1 Decay2
time time time time time time
Key on Key on

Level
Determines the output level of the Drum Key. This lets you make detailed balance adjustments among the
various sounds of the Drum Key.
Settings: 0–127

Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity)

Determines how the output level of the Drum Key responds to Velocity.
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
0: The output level does not change.

Pan
Sets the pan position (stereo position) of each Drum Key. This will also be used as the basic Pan position
for the Alternate and Random settings.
Settings: L63 (far left)–C (center)–R63 (far right)

MODX Reference Manual 143

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Alternate Pan Drum Part Edit

Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum key is panned alternately left and right Common
for each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position.
Part Settings
Settings: L64–C–R63
General
Random Pan Zone Settings
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum Key is panned randomly left and right for
Zone Transmit
each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the Center Pan position.
Settings: 0–127 Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
Element EQ
EQ
Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 127). Ins Assign
Arpeggio
 Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys
Same as “Copying or Exchanging Elements” for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 132). Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ

Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys

MODX Reference Manual 144

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
A Normal Part (FM-X) can consist of up to eight Operators. There are two types of Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Part Settings
displays: Operator Common Edit display, for editing settings common to all eight Operators; and Operator
Edit display, for editing individual Operators. General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Operator Common Edit (Common)
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Part Settings
Pitch
PEG/Scale
General Filter Type

From the General display you can set various parameters such as Part Name, Volume, and Pan. Filter EG
Filter Scale
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Operator [Common]  [Part Settings]  Effect
Operation
[General]
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Most parameters are the same as parameters on the Element Common Edit display for Normal Parts Form / Freq
(AWM2) (page 66) except the following additional parameters as bellows. Level

Random Pan
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Operator is panned randomly left and right for
each note you press. The Pan setting is used as the Center Pan position. Copy or Exchange
Settings: 0–127 Operators

Alternate Pan
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Operator is panned alternately left and right for
each note you press. The Pan setting is used as the basic Pan position.
Settings: L64–C–R63

Scaling Pan
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pan
position, left and right, of the selected Operator. At note C3, the main Pan setting is used for the basic Pan
position. Positive settings will cause the Pan position to be set left when you play in the lower range on the
keyboard and to be set right when you play in the higher range on the keyboard. A negative setting will
have the opposite effect.
Settings: -64 – +0 – +63

MODX Reference Manual 145

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

KeyOnDly Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch) Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Determines whether or not “Key On Delay Time Length” is synchronized to the tempo. Common
Settings: Off, On
Part Settings
Delay Length (Key On Delay Time Length) General
Determines the time (or elapsed delay) between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the Algorithm
point at which the sound is actually played. You can set different delay times for each Operator. This is not
Zone Settings
available when “KeyOnDly Sync” is set to on.
Settings: 0–127 Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Delay Length (Key On Delay Note Length) Pitch
Determines the timing of “Key On Delay” when “KeyOnDly Sync” is set to on.
PEG/Scale
Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot.
(dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note Filter Type
triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5
Filter EG
(quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the
beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter Filter Scale
notes to the beat)
Effect
Routing

Algorithm Ins A
Ins B
From the Algorithm display you can specify the Algorithm, which determines the arrangement of the EQ
Operators and how the FM sound is generated.
Ins Assign
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Operator [Common]  [Part Settings]  Arpeggio
Operation
[Algorithm]
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level

Copy or Exchange
Operators

Algorithm (Algorithm Number)

Changes Algorithms.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Feedback (Feedback Level)

Waveforms can be changed by feeding some of the signal generated by an operator back through that
operator. This allows you to set the feedback level.
Settings: 0–7

MODX Reference Manual 146

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Algorithm Search Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Calls up the Algorithm Search display. From this display you can search for desired Algorithms by filtering Common
the number of Carriers, or the maximum length of the serial connection of Operators.
Part Settings
Algorithm list General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Chain Individual
Filters the Algorithms by the maximum length of serial connection of Operators.
Advanced
Settings: 1–8
Motion Seq
Carrier Common
Filters the Algorithms by the number of Carriers. Lane
Settings: 1–8
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Zone Settings 2nd LFO
Control Assign
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 71).
Receive SW
Operator

Zone Transmit Form / Freq

Level
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 73).

Copy or Exchange
Operators

MODX Reference Manual 147

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Pitch/Filter
Common
Part Settings
Pitch General
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 68), except that the Algorithm
Legato Slope parameter is not available. Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
PEG/Scale (Pitch EG/Scale)
Pitch
From the Pitch EG/Scale display you can make all time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine PEG/Scale
how the pitch of the sound changes over time, and the Scale for Parts. Filter Type

[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Operator [Common]  [Pitch/Filter]  Filter EG

Operation
[PEG/Scale] Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Operator
Initial Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release Form / Freq
Time – Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time Level
Level Hold Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release Level

Settings: Time: 0–99

Level: -50 – +50 Copy or Exchange
Operators
PEG Depth
Determines the pitch range for Pitch EG.
Settings: 8 oct, 2 oct, 1 oct, 0.5 oct

Depth/Vel (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity)

Determines how the pitch range will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you play
notes on the keyboard.
Settings: 0–7

Time/Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pitch EG
Times. The Center Key (C3) is used as the basic pitch for this parameter.
Settings: 0–7
Positive values: High notes result in a high PEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.
0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.

MODX Reference Manual 148

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity) Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the pitch interval of adjacent notes), assuming the pitch Common
of the Center Key (below) as standard.
Part Settings
Settings: -200% – +0% – +200%
+100% (the normal setting): Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart. General
0%: All notes have the same pitch as the Center Key. Algorithm
Negative values: The settings are reversed. Zone Settings

Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Zone Transmit
Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on pitch. Pitch / Filter
Settings: C -2 – G8 Pitch
PEG/Scale
Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the pitch responds to velocity. Filter Type
Settings: -64 – 63 Filter EG
Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises. Filter Scale
Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.
Effect
0: No change in pitch.
Routing
Random Pitch (Random Pitch Depth) Ins A
Allows you to randomly vary the pitch for each note played. Ins B
Settings: 0–127
EQ
NOTE For details on PEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Filter Type
Individual
Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 113). Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Filter EG
Lane
Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 118). Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Filter Scale
Control Assign
Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 120). Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level

Copy or Exchange
Operators

MODX Reference Manual 149

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Effect
Common
Part Settings
Routing General
From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for Parts. Algorithm
Zone Settings
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Operator [Common]  [Effect]  [Routing] Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Insertion FX Switch
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Insertion FX Switch
Mod / Control
Insertion FX Switch Part LFO
Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not. 2nd LFO
Settings: Off, On
Control Assign
Category (Effect Category) Receive SW
Type (Effect Type) Operator
Determines the category and type for the selected Effect. Form / Freq
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
Level
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
Copy or Exchange
applications and situations.
Operators
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document.

Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)

Determines the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. This is not active depending on Effect Types.
For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display (page 76) of the Normal Part (AWM2).
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off

Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)

Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram
in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect
connection” (page 20) of the “Basic Structure.”
Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA

MODX Reference Manual 150

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Rev Send (Reverb Send) Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb effect. Common
Settings: 0–127
Part Settings
Var Send (Variation Send) General
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Variation effect. Algorithm
Settings: 0–127 Zone Settings

Part Output (Part Output Select) Zone Transmit

Determines the specific audio output. Pitch / Filter
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2...USB7&8, USB1...USB8, Off Pitch
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
PEG/Scale
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Filter Type
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output. Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Ins A (Insertion Effect A)
Routing
Ins B (Insertion Effect B)
Ins A
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 77). Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
EQ (Part Equalizer)
Arpeggio
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 78). Common
Individual
Advanced
Ins Assign (Insertion Assign)
Motion Seq
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 81). Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Arpeggio Part LFO
2nd LFO
Common Control Assign
Receive SW
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 82).
Operator
Form / Freq
Individual Level

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 85).

Copy or Exchange
Operators
Advanced
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 87).

Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)

Common
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 88).

Lane
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 91).

MODX Reference Manual 151

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Mod/Control (Modulation/Control)
Common
Part Settings
Part LFO General
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 96), except that the Algorithm
setting values of the Destination parameter differ and that “Element Phase Offset (LFO Element Phase Zone Settings
Offset)” is not available. For details on the setting values, see the Data List PDF document.
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter

2nd LFO Pitch

PEG/Scale
Filter Type
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Operator [Common]  [Mod/Control] 
Operation
[2nd LFO] Filter EG
Filter Scale
Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio
(2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio) Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio Operator
(2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)
Form / Freq
LFO Wave (2nd LFO Waveform)
Level
Selects the 2nd LFO waveform.
Settings: Triangle, Saw Down, Saw Up, Square, Sine, S/H
NOTE When “Sine” is selected, two waves will be shown in the diagram on the display because of the phase shift of
the Amplitude Modulation wave.
Copy or Exchange
Operators
Key On Reset (2nd LFO Key On Reset)
Determines whether or not the 2nd LFO is reset each time a note is pressed.
Settings: Off, On

Speed (2nd LFO Speed)

Adjusts the speed (frequency) of the 2nd LFO variation.
Settings: 0–99

Phase (2nd LFO Phase)

Determines the starting phase point for the 2nd LFO Wave when it is reset.
Settings: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°

Delay (2nd LFO Delay Time)

Determines the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the 2nd
LFO comes into effect.
Settings: 0–99

MODX Reference Manual 152

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Pitch Modulation (2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth) Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound. Common
Settings: 0–99
Part Settings
Amplitude Modulation (2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth) General
Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude or Algorithm
volume of the sound.
Zone Settings
Settings: 0–99
Zone Transmit
Filter Modulation (2nd LFO Filter Modulation Depth) Pitch / Filter
Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff Pitch
frequency.
PEG/Scale
Settings: 0–99
Filter Type
Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio Filter EG
(2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio) Filter Scale
Adjusts the amount (depth) which is determined in the “2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth” for each
Operator. Effect
Settings: 0–7 Routing
Ins A
Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio
Ins B
(2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)
Adjusts the amount (depth) which is determined in the “2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth” for each EQ
Operator. Ins Assign
Settings: 0–7 Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Control Assign
Advanced
Motion Seq
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Operator [Common]  [Mod/Control] 
Operation Common
[Control Assign]
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level

Copy or Exchange
Operators

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 100), except for the
different setting values in the Destination parameter. For details on the setting value, see the Data List PDF
document.
Also the following parameter is shown on this display.

Operator SW (Operator Switch)

Selects whether the controller will affect each individual Operator (On) or not (Off). This is available only
when an Operator-related parameter is set in “Destination.”
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 153

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
Operator Rate EQ
Determines the sensitivity of the Controller in changing the parameter set in “Destination” for each Ins Assign
Operator.
Arpeggio
This is available only when “Destination” is set to “OP Freq” or “OP AEG Offset.”
Settings: Off, On Common
Individual
SW/Rate (Operator Switch/Operator Rate Switch)
Advanced
Switches displays between “Operator Switch” and “Operator Rate.”
This is available only when “Destination” is set to “OP Freq” or “OP AEG Offset.” Motion Seq
Settings: Off, On Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Receive SW (Receive Switch)
Part LFO
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 105). 2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level

Copy or Exchange
Operators

MODX Reference Manual 154

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Operator Edit (Operator)
Common
Form/Freq (Form/Frequency) Part Settings
General
From the Form/Frequency display you can make all the waveform and frequency settings for Operators.
Algorithm
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Operator selection  [Form/Freq] Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Common
Initial Attack Decay Lane
Time – Attack Time Decay Time Mod / Control
Level Initial Level Attack Level – Part LFO
2nd LFO
Settings: Time: 0–99
Level: -50 – +50 Control Assign
Receive SW
Spectral (Spectral Form) Operator
Determines the “spectral form” of the selected Operator.
Form / Freq
Settings: Sine, All 1, All 2, Odd 1, Odd 2, Res 1, Res 2
Level
Skirt (Spectral Skirt)
Determines the spread of the “skirt” at the bottom of the formant harmonics curve. Higher values produce
a wider skirt and smaller values produce a narrower skirt. This is not available when “Spectral” is set to
“Sine.” Copy or Exchange
Operators
Settings: 0–7

Resonance (Spectral Resonance)

Determines the degree to which velocity affects the Resonance of the Spectral Form. The center frequency
moves to higher frequencies, letting you create a special resonance in the sound. This is active only when
“Spectral” is set to “Res 1” or “Res 2.”
Settings: 0–99

MODX Reference Manual 155

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Basic waveforms used as Operators contain harmonics, with the exception of “Sine.” A sine wave contains Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
its fundamental frequency with no additional harmonics. Therefore, when “Form” is set to any waveform
Common
other than “Sine,” you can adjust harmonics and the peak of each formant, depending on the Waveform
Type by determining the related parameters. Below are the basic waveforms and the characteristic Part Settings
parameters. General
Algorithm
Level Level Zone Settings
Skirt Skirt
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Center Frequency Frequency Center Frequency Frequency Filter Type
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine) (Hz) (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) (Hz)
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Level Level
Skirt Skirt
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Center Frequency Frequency Center Frequency Frequency
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine) (Hz) (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) (Hz) Ins Assign
The larger the “Skirt” value, the more harmonics the wave contains. Arpeggio
Common
Skirt Skirt Individual
Resonance of Resonance of Advanced
Center Frequency Center Frequency
Level Level Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Frequency Frequency 2nd LFO
Center Frequency Center Frequency
(Hz) (Hz)
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine) (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) Control Assign
The larger “Resonance” value, the higher frequency the center frequency is moved. Receive SW
• Resonance=0: The Center frequency is the basic wave
Operator
• Resonance=99: The Center frequency is the 100th harmonic
Form / Freq
Level
Key On Reset (Oscillator Key On Reset)
Determines whether or not the oscillation of the Operator is reset each time a note is pressed.
Settings: Off, On
Copy or Exchange
Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity) Operators
Determines how the pitch of the selected Operator responds to velocity. This is available only when “Freq
Mode” is set to “Fixed.”
Settings: -7 – +7
Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.
Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.
0: No change in pitch.

Freq Mode (Oscillator Frequency Mode)

Determines the settings for the Output Pitch of the Operator.
Settings: Ratio, Fixed
Ratio: Determines the Output Pitch by detecting the note you play on the keyboard.
Fixed: Specifies the Pitch by setting “Coarse” and “Fine.”

MODX Reference Manual 156

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Coarse (Coarse Tune) Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Determines the pitch of each Operator. Common
Settings: When “Freq Mode” is set to “Ratio”: 0–31
When “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed”: 0–21 Part Settings
General
Fine (Fine Tune) Algorithm
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Operator.
Zone Settings
Settings: When “Freq Mode” is set to “Ratio”: 0–99
When “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed”: 0–127 Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Detune
Pitch
Sets the Output Pitch of the Operator slightly higher or lower.
Even if the same parameter value is set for both “Coarse Tune” and “Fine Tune,” the Detune lets you PEG/Scale
slightly raise or lower the pitch of each Operator, allowing you to add an extra dimension to the sound and Filter Type
enhance the spatial characteristics.
Filter EG
Settings: -15 – +15
Filter Scale
Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity) Effect
Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the degree depending on their position or octave Routing
range). This is available only when “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed.”
Ins A
Settings: 0–99
0: All notes are the same pitch specified by Coarse and Fine. Ins B
99: Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart. EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Level
Common
From the Level display you can make all the volume settings for the Operator. Individual

Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Operator selection  [Level] Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level

Copy or Exchange
Operators

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.

Hold Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release

Time Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time
Level – Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release (Hold) Level

Settings: Time: 0–99

Level: 0–99

Level (Operator Level)

Determines the output level of the Operator.
Settings: 0–99

MODX Reference Manual 157

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity) Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Determines how the output level of the Operator responds to Velocity. Common
Settings: -7 – +7
Part Settings
Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises. General
0: The output level does not change. Algorithm
Zone Settings
Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Amplitude Zone Transmit
EG Times. Pitch / Filter
Settings: 0–7 Pitch
Positive values: High notes result in a fast Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.
PEG/Scale
0: The Amplitude EG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.
Filter Type
Break Point Filter EG
Determines the Amplitude Scale Break Points by specifying their respective note numbers. Filter Scale
Settings: A-1 – C8
Effect
Curve Lo (Low Curve) Routing
Curve Hi (High Curve) Ins A
Determines the curve for Amplitude scaling. Ins B
Settings: -Linear, -Exp, +Exp, +Linear
EQ
Lvl/Key Lo (Low Depth) Ins Assign
Lvl/Key Hi (High Depth) Arpeggio
Determines the curve degree of the curve (above). Common
Settings: 0–99
Individual
The keyboard is divided in two at the break point. Advanced
The high-pitch side at the right is set by using the R Depth and the R Curve; the low-pitch side at the left is Motion Seq
set by using the L Depth and the L Curve as described below.
Common
Lane
Output Level +
Mod / Control
+exp +linear +linear +exp
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Low Curve High Curve
Low Depth High Depth Receive SW
Key
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
-exp -linear -linear -exp

-
Break Point Output Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
The Output level of the Key set as the Break Point depends on the Operator Level setting. For the Keys in
the left side of the Break Point, the Output level is adjusted based on the curve which is determined by the
Low Curve and Low Depth. For the Keys in the right side of the Break Point, the Output level is adjusted
based on the curve which is determined by the High Curve and High Depth. The Output level changes in
an exponential fashion from the Break Point on the Exp type curve and the Output level changes in a linear
fashion from the Break Point in the Linear type curve. In either case, the farther away from the Break Point
the key is, the greater the Output level changes for the key.

 Copying or Exchanging Operators

Same as “Copying or Exchanging Elements” for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 132).

MODX Reference Manual 158

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio Edit (Common/Audio)
Common/Audio
A Performance consists up to 16 Parts. You can set the parameters related to the entire Performance and General
the Audio Parts in the Common/Audio Edit display.
Audio In
Mixing
General Routing
Ins A
From the General display you can set various parameters for the Performance.
Ins B
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  [General] EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor

Performance Name
Determines the selected Performance name. Performance names can contain up to 20 characters.
Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.

Motion Control Flag

Determines whether or not to add the “Motion Control” attribute to the selected Performance. When this is
set to on, the “MC” icon is displayed in the Performance Play display (page 27). The Performance can be
filtered as “MC” in the Performance Category Search display (page 176).
Settings: Off, On

Tg Flag (Tone Generator Flag)

Shows the attribute by the Tone Generator of the selected Performance. The name icon of the selected
Tone Generator is displayed in the Performance Play display (page 27). The Performance can be filtered
as “AWM2/FM/AWM2+FM-X” in the Performance Category Search display (page 176).
Settings: AWM2, FM-X, AWM2+FM-X

Volume (Performance Volume)

Determines the output volume of the selected Performance.
Settings: 0–127

Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Performance.
Settings: L63–C–R63

Var Return (Variation Return)

Determines the return level of the Variation effect.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 159

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Rev Return (Reverb Return) Common/Audio Edit

Determines the return level of the Reverb effect. Common/Audio
Settings: 0–127
General
Audition Phrase Bank Audio In
Selects an Audition Phrase Bank. Mixing
Routing
Audition Phrase Number
Determines the Audition Phrase Number. You can hear a sample of the selected Performance sounds that Ins A
is called “Audition phrase.” The best matching Audition Phrase is assigned to each Preset Performance in Ins B
advance. EQ
Settings: 1–1093
Motion Seq
Note Shift (Audition Phrase Note Shift) Common
Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for the Audition Phrase in semitones. Lane
Settings: -24semi – +24semi Control

Velocity Shift (Audition Phrase Velocity Shift) Control Assign

Determines the velocity of the Audition Phrase. Control Number
Settings: -63 – +63 Effect
Routing
Portamento Master SW (Portamento Master Switch)
Determines whether Portamento is applied to the Part or not when the “Portamento Part SW” is set to on for Variation
the Part. Reverb
Settings: Off, On Master FX

Portamento Time Master EQ

Determines the pitch transition time or rate when Portamento is applied. USB Monitor
Settings: -64 – +63

Assign 1 Mode/Assign 2 Mode (Assignable Switch 1 Mode/Assignable Switch 2 Mode)

Determines whether the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons functions as a latch type or momentary type.
Settings: Latch, Momentary
Latch: When set to “Latch,” pressing the button alternates the status between on and off.
Momentary: When set to “Momentary,” pressing/holding the button turns on and releasing the button turns off.

MS Hold Mode (Motion Sequencer Hold Mode)

Determines how the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button responds when pressed.
Settings: Latch, Momentary
Latch: When set to “Latch,” pressing the button alternates the status between on and off.
Momentary: When set to “Momentary,” pressing/holding the button turns on and releasing the button turns off.

Update User Auditions

Converts all of the songs recorded on the MODX to User Auditions. If the User Auditions already exist, all
User Auditions will be overwritten.

MODX Reference Manual 160

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Common/Audio Edit
Audio In
Common/Audio
General
Mixing Audio In
From the Mixing display you can adjust the volume settings of the Audio Part (the input signal from the A/D Mixing
INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks) and the Digital Part (the input signal from the [USB TO HOST] terminal*). Routing
* Only the sound of the Port which, among all Device Ports, is set to “Digital L/R.” Ins A
Ins B
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  [Audio In]  [Mixing]
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor

A/D In Input Mode/Digital In Input Mode (A/D Part Input Mode/Digital Part Input Mode)
Determines the signal configuration for the A/D Part/Digital Part, or how the signal or signals are routed
(stereo or mono).
Settings: L Mono, R Mono, L+R Mono, Stereo
L Mono: Only the L channel is used.
R Mono: Only the R channel is used.
L+R Mono: The L and R channels are mixed and processed in mono.
Stereo: Both the L and R channels are used.
NOTE The sound input only from the [L/MONO] channel is processed in mono.

Volume (A/D Part Volume/Digital Part Volume)

Determines the output level of the A/D Part/Digital Part.
Settings: 0–127

Pan (A/D Part Pan/Digital Part Pan)

Determines the stereo pan position of the A/D Part/Digital Part.
Settings: L63–C–R63

Dry Level (A/D Part Dry Level/Digital Part Dry Level)

Determines the level of the A/D Part/Digital Part which has not been processed with the System Effect. This
is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0–127

Var Send (A/D Part Variation Send / Digital Part Variation Send)
Determines the Send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part signal sent to the Variation effect. This is available
only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R,” and for the A/D Part, “Global A/D” is set to “OFF.”
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 161

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Rev Send (A/D Part Reverb Send/Digital Part Reverb Send) Common/Audio Edit
Determines the Send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part signal sent to the Reverb effect. This is available Common/Audio
only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R,” and for the A/D Part, “Global A/D” is set to “OFF.”
General
Settings: 0–127
Audio In
Output Select (A/D Part Part Output Select/Digital Part Part Output Select) Mixing
Determines the specific output(s) for the individual A/D Part/Digital Part signal.
Routing
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8, Off
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Ins A
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Ins B
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. EQ
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Motion Seq
Common

Routing Lane
Control
From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for the A/D Part. Control Assign
Control Number
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  [Audio In]  [Routing]
Effect
Insertion FX Switch Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor

Insertion FX Switch

Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch)

Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not.
Settings: Off, On

Category (Effect Category)

Type (Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected Effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed
settings.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document.

MODX Reference Manual 162

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part) Common/Audio Edit

Determines the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. Common/Audio
This is not available depending on the Effect Type.
For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display of the Normal Part (AWM2) (page 76). General
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Audio In
Mixing
Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)
Routing
Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram
in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect Ins A
connection” (page 20) of the “Basic Structure.” Ins B
Settings: Ins AB, Ins BA EQ

Rev Send (Reverb Send) Motion Seq

Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Common
Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R” and “Global A/D” is set to Lane
“OFF.”
Control

Settings: 0–127 Control Assign

Control Number
Var Send (Variation Send)
Effect
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the
Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R” and “Global A/D” is set to Routing
“OFF.” Variation
Settings: 0–127 Reverb
Master FX
Envelope Follower
Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. For details, see the Routing display (page 76) of Normal Master EQ
Part (AWM2) Edit. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.” USB Monitor

Output Select (Part Output Select)

Determines specific audio output.
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, AsgnL, USB1…USB8, Off
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.

Ins A (Insertion Effect A)

Ins B (Insertion Effect B)
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 77).

EQ (Equalizer)
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 78) except that “3-band
EQ” is inactive.

MODX Reference Manual 163

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Common/Audio Edit
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)
Common/Audio
General
Common Audio In
From the Common display you can set the parameters related to Motion Sequencer commonly used for all Mixing
Parts in Common/Audio Part. Routing
Ins A
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  [Motion Seq]  [Common]
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor

Common Clock Swing (Common Swing)

Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset
value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part.
Settings: -120 – +120

Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply)

Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance.
This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for the Part is set to “Common.”
By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original one.
Settings: 50%–400%
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.

Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time)

Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value
for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100 – +100

Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate)

Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the
Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100 – +100

Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude)

Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines
how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting in
the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63

MODX Reference Manual 164

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape) Common/Audio Edit
Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the step Common/Audio
curve shape of the sequence.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane General
Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape Audio In
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on Mixing
for the parameter).
Routing
Settings: -100 – +100
Ins A
Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Ins B
Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the EQ
degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq
Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the Smoothness Common
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane). Lane
Settings: -64 – +63
Control
Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random) Control Assign
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree to Control Number
which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
Effect
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63 Routing
Variation
Random (A/D Part Motion Sequencer Random) Reverb
Determines the degree of random change in the Step Value of the Motion Sequence for the A/D Part is. For
details about “Random,” see “Quick Edit” on page 38. Master FX
Settings: 0–127 Master EQ
USB Monitor
Sync Part (Motion Sequencer Sync Part)
Determines the Part for synchronizing to the Motion Sequencer. The Motion Sequencer is synchronized to
the Note On setting and the Arp/Motion Seq Grid setting of the specified Part.
Settings: Part 1–Part 16

Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)

Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is
displayed in clocks. For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. This setting is applied
to the Part which is selected as the Sync Part (above).
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)

Lane
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 91).

MODX Reference Manual 165

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Common/Audio Edit
Control
Common/Audio
General
Control Assign Audio In
Mixing
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  [Control]  [Control Assign]
Operation or Routing
Touch [Edit Super Knob] in the Super Knob display. Ins A
Ins B
Touching the “+” button adds a Part parameter to be used as a control target.
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 100), except for the
following parameters.

Destination
When “Source” is set to “AsgnKnob 1–8,” “Part 1–16 Assign 1–8” are added as this parameter values. In
this case, “Curve Type” and “Curve Ratio” are not selectable.
Settings: See the “Control List” in the Data List PDF document.

Source
When “Destination” is set to “Part 1–16 Assign 1–8,” only “AsgnKnob 1–8” can be set for this parameter.
Settings: AsgnKnob 1–8, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst

Display Filter
Determines the Controller to be displayed. When “Super Knob” is selected, all Assignable Knob settings in
which “Super Knob Link” is set to On are displayed.
Settings: AsgnKnob 1–8, Super Knob, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst, All

The following parameters are displayed only when “Destination 1–16” is set to “Part 1–16 Assign 1–8.”
Also, when Destination is not set to any Assignable Knobs for the Part, only the shortcut buttons are
available.

Destination
Determines the controller settings for the Part to be displayed.
Settings: 1–16 (The number of Destinations for the Assignable Knobs for the Part which is selected in “Destination 1–16” is
displayed.)

Parameter
Determines the parameters for the Part to be controlled.
Settings: Refer to the “Control List” in the Data List.

MODX Reference Manual 166

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Edit Part Control Settings Common/Audio Edit

Calls up the Control Assign display for the currently selected Part. Common/Audio

Curve Type General

Determines the specific curve for changing the parameter which is set in “Destination.” The horizontal axis Audio In
indicates the value of the controller set in “Source” and the vertical axis indicates the parameter values. Mixing
Settings: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Square, Trapezoid, Tilt
Routing
Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold
For User Bank: User 1–32 Ins A
When a Library file is read: Curves in Library 1–8 Ins B
EQ
Polarity (Curve Polarity)
Determines the Curve Polarity of the Curve type set in “Curve Type.” Motion Seq
Settings: Uni, Bi Common
Uni: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction or in a negative direction from a base parameter value according Lane
to the Curve shape.
Control
Bi: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value.
Control Assign
Ratio (Curve Ratio) Control Number
Determines the Curve Ratio.
Effect
Settings: -64 – +63
Routing
Variation
Control Number Reverb
Master FX
Determines the MIDI Control Change numbers common for the entire system. You can use the Knobs on
the front panel and external controllers by assigning appropriate MIDI Control Change numbers. When the Master EQ
same control number is assigned to the Super Knob and any Assignable Knob, the Super Knob takes USB Monitor
priority and operation of the Assignable Knob may be ignored. A warning message appears in that case.
NOTE External controllers include external sequencers and external MIDI controllers.
NOTE The Control Number set in this display is stored as Performance data. However, “FS Assign,” “Super Knob CC”
and “Scene CC” are stored as general system settings, and not as Performance data.

Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  [Control]  [Control Number]

Ribbon Ctrl (Ribbon Controller Control Number)

Determines the Control Change Number received from an external device with a Ribbon Controller.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from an external device, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the Ribbon
Controller.
Settings: Off, 1–95

MODX Reference Manual 167

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Breath Ctrl (Breath Controller Control Number) Common/Audio Edit

Determines the Control Change Number received from the external equipment such as a Breath Controller. Common/Audio
Even when the instrument receives MIDI message with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the General
Breath Controller. Audio In
Settings: Off, 1–95 Mixing
Routing
Foot Ctrl 1/Foot Ctrl 2
(Foot Controller 1 Control Number/Foot Controller 2 Control Number) Ins A
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using a Foot Controller connected to the FOOT Ins B
CONTROLLER [1] /[2] jack. EQ
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the Foot Motion Seq
Controller. Common
Settings: Off, 1–95, Super Knob Lane
Control
Assign SW 1/Assign SW 2
(Assignable Switch 1 Control Number/Assignable Switch 2 Control Number) Control Assign
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button Control Number
(Assignable Switch 1/2). Effect
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the Routing
[ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button (Assignable Switch 1/2.) Variation
Settings: Off, 1–95 Reverb
Master FX
MS Hold (Motion Sequencer Hold Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion Master EQ
Sequencer Hold) button. USB Monitor
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
[MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion Sequencer Hold) button.
Settings: Off, 1–95

MS Trigger (Motion Sequencer Trigger Control Number)

Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion
Sequencer Trigger) button.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
[MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion Sequencer Trigger) button.
Settings: Off, 1–95

Assign Knob 1–8 (Assignable Knob 1–8 Control Number)

Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the Assignable Knob 1–8.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
Assignable Knob 1–8.
Settings: Off, 1–95

MIDI Settings
Calls up the MIDI I/O display in Utility.

MODX Reference Manual 168

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Common/Audio Edit
Effect
Common/Audio
General
Routing Audio In
From this display you can determine the System Effect and Master Effect connections that commonly Mixing
affect all Parts. Routing
Ins A
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  [Effect]  [Routing]
Ins B
EQ
Reverb Switch
Variation Switch Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor

Master Effect Switch

Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Switch

Determines whether Variation/Reverb/Master Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On

Category (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Category)

Type (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Preset)

Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Variation/Reverb/Master Effect type, designed to
be used for specific applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.

Side Chain/Modulator (Variation/Master Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part)

Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Variation/Master Effect.
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off

Var Return (Variation Return)

Rev Return (Reverb Return)
Determines the return level of the Variation/Reverb effect.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 169

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Var Pan (Variation Pan) Common/Audio Edit

Rev Pan (Reverb Pan) Common/Audio
Determines the pan position of the Variation/Reverb effect.
General
Settings: L63 (far left)–C (center)–R63 (far right)
Audio In
Var to Rev (Variation to Reverb) Mixing
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Variation Effect to the Reverb Effect. Routing
Settings: 0–127
Ins A
Master EQ (Master Equalizer Switch) Ins B
Determines whether the Master EQ is active or not. EQ
Settings: Off, On Motion Seq

Envelope Follower Common

Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. See the Routing display (page 75) for the Normal Part Lane
(AWM2). Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Variation
Effect
From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Variation effect. Routing
Variation
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  [Effect]  [Variation]
Reverb
Master FX
Variation Switch
Master EQ
USB Monitor

Effect Parameter

Variation Switch
Determines whether the Variation effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On

Category (Variation Category)

Type (Variation Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset (Variation Preset)

Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.

MODX Reference Manual 170

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Side Chain/Modulator (Variation Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part) Common/Audio Edit

Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Variation Effect. Common/Audio
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
General
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off
Audio In
Effect Parameter Mixing
Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect
Routing
parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for
each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Reverb Motion Seq

From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Reverb effect. Common
Lane
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  [Effect]  [Reverb] Control
Control Assign
Reverb Switch
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor

Effect Parameter

Reverb Switch
Determines whether the Reverb effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On

Category (Reverb Category)

Type (Reverb Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset (Reverb Preset)

Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.

Effect Parameter
Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect
parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for
each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

MODX Reference Manual 171

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Common/Audio Edit
Master FX (Master Effect)
Common/Audio
From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Master Effect. General
Audio In
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  [Effect]  [Master FX]
Mixing

Master Effect Switch Routing

Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor

Effect Parameter

Master Effect Switch

Determines whether the Master Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On

Category (Master Effect Category)

Type (Master Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset (Master Effect Preset)

Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.

Side Chain/Modulator (Master Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part)

Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Master Effect.
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off

Effect Parameter
Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect
parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for
each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

MODX Reference Manual 172

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Common/Audio Edit
Master EQ (Master Equalizer)
Common/Audio
From this display you can set parameters related to the Master EQ. General
Audio In
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  [Effect]  [Master EQ]
Mixing

Master EQ Switch Routing

Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor

Low Shape High Shape

Master EQ Switch
Determines whether the Master EQ is active or not.
Settings: Off, On

Low Gain (Master EQ Low Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Lo Mid Gain (Master EQ Low Mid Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Mid Gain (Master EQ Mid Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Hi Mid Gain (Master EQ High Mid Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB

High Gain (Master EQ High Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Low Freq (Master EQ Low Frequency)

Determines the frequency for the Master Low band.
Settings: 32Hz–2.0kHz

MODX Reference Manual 173

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Lo Mid Freq (Master EQ Low Mid Frequency) Common/Audio Edit

Determines the frequency for the Master Low Mid band. Common/Audio
Settings: 100Hz–10kHz
General
Mid Freq (Master EQ Mid Frequency) Audio In
Determines the frequency for the Master Mid band. Mixing
Settings: 100Hz–10kHz Routing

Hi Mid Freq (Master EQ High Mid Frequency) Ins A

Determines the frequency for the Master High Mid band. Ins B
Settings: 100Hz–10kHz EQ
Motion Seq
High Freq (Master EQ High Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Master High band. Common
Settings: 500Hz–16kHz Lane
Control
Low Q (Master EQ Low Q)
Control Assign
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Low band. This is available only when the Master EQ Low
Shape (below) is set to “Peak.” Control Number
Settings: 0.1–12.0 Effect
Routing
Lo Mid Q (Master EQ Low Mid Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Low Mid band. Variation
Settings: 0.1–12.0 Reverb
Master FX
Mid Q (Master EQ Mid Q)
Master EQ
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Mid band.
Settings: 0.1–12.0 USB Monitor

Hi Mid Q (Master EQ High Mid Q)

Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master High Mid band.
Settings: 0.1–12.0

High Q (Master EQ High Q)

Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master High band. This is available only when the Master EQ High
Shape (below) is set to “Peak.”
Settings: 0.1–12.0

Low Shape (Master EQ Low Shape)

High Shape (Master EQ High Shape)
Determines whether the equalizer type used is Shelving or Peaking. The Peaking type attenuates/boosts
the signal at the specified Frequency setting, whereas the Shelving type attenuates/boosts the signal at
frequencies above or below the specified Frequency setting. This parameter is available only for the LOW
and HIGH frequency bands.
Settings: Shelf (Shelving Type), Peak (Peaking Type)

MODX Reference Manual 174

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

Common/Audio Edit
USB Monitor
Common/Audio
From the USB Monitor display, you can adjust the Audio Input level from the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
General
NOTE USB Main Monitor Volume is stored as Performance Data.
Audio In
Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  [USB Monitor] Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor

USB Main Monitor Volume

Adjusts the Audio signal level which is input from the [USB TO HOST] terminal and output to the OUTPUT
[L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Settings: 0–127

Audio Settings
Calls up the Audio I/O display in Utility.

MODX Reference Manual 175

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Search
Category Search
Performance Category
The Performances/Arpeggios/Waveforms are conveniently divided into specific Categories. The
Arp Category
categories are divided based on the general instrument type or sound characteristics. The Category
Search function gives you quick access to the sounds you want. Waveform
The Favorite function has been added, giving you quick access to desired sounds and Arpeggios. Rhythm Pattern
NOTE You can filter the Performance List by Favorite in the Part Category Search and in the Performance Merge, but
you cannot turn the Favorite icon on/off from the search displays.

Performance Category Search

From the Performance Category Search display you can search and select the Performance.

 In case of Performance Category Search

[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [CATEGORY] (Performance Category Search)

Operation or
Touch the Performance Name  Select [Category Search] from the displayed menu

Name Search

Favorite icon Performance list

Bank/Favorite (Performance Bank Select/Favorite)

Filters the Performance List by Bank or Favorite. When Favorite is selected, only Performances having a
Favorite icon are listed.
Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)
NOTE When the Category Search display is selected, pressing the [CATEGORY] button repeatedly switches Banks
among All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library (when the Library file is read). Holding down the [CATEGORY] button
lets you go back to All.

Attribute (Performance Attribute)

Filters the Performance List by Attribute (page 159). This is not available for Part Category Search.
Settings: All, AWM2, FM, AWM2+FM-X, MC, SSS, Single, Multi

Name Search (Performance Name Search)

Searches the Performance by inputting a part of the Performance Name.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

MODX Reference Manual 176

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Main (Performance Main Category) Search

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Performance Category
Sub (Performance Sub Category) Arp Category
Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
Audition (Audition Switch)
Determines whether the Audition phrase is played back or not. This is not available when “Audition Lock”
(page 193) is set to on in the Utility display.
Settings: Off, On

Sort (Sort Order)

Determines the Sort Order of the Performance List.
Settings: Default, Name, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.

Favorite Set / Unset

Enters (Sets) or cancels (Unsets) the Favorite icon to the currently selected Performance. This is not
available when the cursor is not on the Performance List.
NOTE You can also set/unset the Favorite icon from the menu which is displayed by touching the Performance name
on the Performance Play (Home) display.

Favorite All Clear

Clears all Favorite icons on Performances. This is available only when at least one Performance has a
Favorite icon.

MODX Reference Manual 177

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 In case of Part Category Search Search

You can select any Part in a Performance and assign the sound of the Part to another. Performance Category
When “Mixing” of the “Parameter with Part” (Param. with Part) setting is set to off, you can change sounds
continuously, using the current setting values for the Part such as Volume, Pan and Note shift. Arp Category
Waveform
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  (When the Part to which any sounds are assigned is selected) Select Rhythm Pattern
the Part Name  [SHIFT]+[CATEGORY] (Part Category Search)
Operation or
(When the Part to which any sounds are assigned is selected) Touch the Part Name  Select
[Category Search] from the displayed menu

When the selected Part and all succeeding Parts have no sound assigned (or are empty), executing the
operation above opens the Performance Merge display.

Source
Determines which Part of the selected Performance will be assigned to the Performance being edited.
Settings: Part 1–16

Solo (Solo Switch)

Determines the Solo function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this is set to on and any sound is assigned to
the Part, only the Part will be sounded.
Settings: Off, On

Param. with part (Parameter with Part)

Determines whether or not to read and use the parameter values for the next Performance. When the set of
parameters is set to off, the current setting values are continuously used even when the next Performance
is selected.
The “Zone” parameter is available only when “Zone Master” (page 193) is set to on in the Utility display.
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 178

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 Performance Merge Search

From the Performance Merge display, you can collectively assign multiple Parts from the selected Performance Category
Performance to empty Parts in the Performance currently being edited. For example, you can merge four
Arp Category
Piano Parts in one Performance and two Strings Parts in another Performance to create even more richly
textured, layered sounds. Waveform
This allows you to separately mute original Parts and newly added Parts. Rhythm Pattern

[PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  (the selected Part and all Parts that follow must not be assigned) 
Operation
[SHIFT] + [CATEGORY] or touch the “+” icon

Additional Part Mute

Original Part Mute

Source
Determines which Part of the selected Performance will be assigned to the Performance being edited.
Settings: All, Part 1–16
All: All non-empty Parts of the selected Performance are assigned to available empty Parts.
Part 1–16: Only the sound from the specified Part is assigned to the selected Part.

Original Part Mute

When set to OFF, all of the Parts existed before adding any Parts in the Performance Merge display will be
muted.
Settings: Off, On

Additional Part Mute

When set to OFF, only the Part added in the Performance Merge display will be muted.
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 179

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Arpeggio Category Search (Arp Category Search) Search

From the Arpeggio Category Search display you can search and select Arpeggio Types. Performance Category
Arp Category
Operation Arpeggio related display  Part selection  [CATEGORY]
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
Name Search

Favorite icon Arpeggio Type list

Bank/Favorite (Performance Bank Select/Favorite)

Filters the Performance List by Bank or Favorite. When Favorite is selected, only Performances having a
Favorite icon are listed.
Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)
When the Category Search display is selected, pressing the [CATEGORY] button repeatedly switches Banks among
All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library (when the Library file is read). Holding down the [CATEGORY] button lets you go
back to All.

Name Search (Arpeggio Name Search)

Searches for an Arpeggio by inputting a part of the Arpeggio Name.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Main (Arpeggio Category)

Settings: See the Arpeggio Category List (page 11).

Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category)

Settings: See the Arpeggio Sub Category List (page 11).

Sort (Sort Order)

Determines the Sort Order of the Arpeggio Type List.
Settings: Default, Name, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Date: Sorts in order of loading. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer
to older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.

Favorite Set / Unset

Enters (Sets) or cancels (Unsets) the Favorite icon to the currently selected Performance. This is not
available when the cursor is not on the Performance List.

MODX Reference Manual 180

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Favorite All Clear Search

Clears all Favorite icons on Performances. This is available only when at least one Performance has a Performance Category
Favorite icon.
Arp Category
Page (Page Select) Waveform
When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through Rhythm Pattern
the pages.

MODX Reference Manual 181

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Waveform Category Search (Waveform Search) Search

From the Waveform Category Search display you can search and select the Waveforms. Performance Category
Arp Category
Operation Waveform related display  Part selection  Waveform selection  [CATEGORY]
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
Name Search

Favorite icon Waveform list

Bank/Favorite (Performance Bank Select/Favorite)

Filters the Performance List by Bank or Favorite. When Favorite is selected, only Performances having a
Favorite icon are listed.
Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)
When the Category Search display is selected, pressing the [CATEGORY] button repeatedly switches Banks among
All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library (when the Library file is read). Holding down the [CATEGORY] button lets you go
back to All.

Name Search (Waveform Name Search)

Searches for a Waveform by inputting a part of the Waveform Name.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Main (Waveform Category)

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Sub (Waveform Sub Category)

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Sort (Sort Order)

Determines the Sort Order of the Waveform List.
Settings: Default, Name, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.

Favorite Set / Unset

Enters (Sets) or cancels (Unsets) the Favorite icon to the currently selected Performance. This is not
available when the cursor is not on the Performance List.

MODX Reference Manual 182

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Favorite All Clear Search

Clears all Favorite icons on Performances. This is available only when at least one Performance has a Performance Category
Favorite icon.
Arp Category
Page (Page Select) Waveform
When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through Rhythm Pattern
the pages.

MODX Reference Manual 183

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Rhythm Pattern Search

Use this function to add and set up a Drum Part. Performance Category
Arp Category
Operation [RHYTHM PART]
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
Name Search

Rhythm Pattern List

Bank/Favorite (Rhythm Pattern Bank Select)

Filters the Rhythm Pattern List by Bank or Favorite.
Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)

Name Search (Rhythm Pattern Name Search)

Searches the Rhythm Patterns by inputting a part of the Rhythm Pattern Name.

Original Part Mute

When set to OFF, all of the Parts existed before adding any Parts in the Rhythm Pattern display will be
muted.
Settings: Off, On

Additional Part Mute

When set to OFF, only the Part added in the Rhythm Pattern display will be muted.
Settings: Off, On

Sort (Sort Order)

Determines the Sort Order of the Rhythm Pattern List.
Settings: Default, Name, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.

Page (Page Select)

When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through
the pages.

Cancel
Touching this button or pressing the [RHYTHM PATTERN] button cancels the selection and closes the
Rhythm Pattern display.

MODX Reference Manual 184

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 Arpeggio Tab Search

Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern

Arpeggio Tab

Arp Category (Arpeggio Category)

Arp Sub Category (Arpeggio Sub Category)
Arp Name (Arpeggio Name)
Arp Select (Arpeggio Select)
Same as the Individual display for Arpeggio (page 85).

Tempo
Determines the Rhythm Part tempo.
Settings: 5–300

Volume
Determines the Rhythm Part volume.
Settings: 0–127

MODX Reference Manual 185

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 Envelope Follower Tab Search

Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern

Envelope Follower Tab

Envelope Follower Switch

Determines whether the Envelope Follower is used (on) or not (off).
Settings: Off, On

Envelope Follower Gain

Same as the parameter in the Envelope Follower display (page 21).

Edit
Opens the Envelope Follower setting display.

Destination
Settings: Volume, Cutoff, Resonance, Pitch, Pan, Reverb Send, Variation Send, LFO Speed, LFO Depth 1, LFO Depth 2, LFO
Depth 3

Curve Type
Curve Polarity
Curve Ratio
Same as the parameters in the Control Assign display (page 100).

Curve Parameter 1
Curve Parameter 2
Settings: 0–127
NOTE This parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type.

MODX Reference Manual 186

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Uitlity
Utility
Settings
The Utility display has four tabs; the Setting tab, the Contents tab, the Tempo Settings tab, the Effect Sound
Switch tab, and the Other Info tab. You can make various settings for the entire system.
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
Settings
MIDI I/O
Advanced
Sound System

From the Sound display you can make overall settings for the sounds output from the instrument. Contents
Load
Operation [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Sound] Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices

Tone Generator Volume

Determines the overall volume of the instrument.
Settings: 0–127

Tone Generator Note Shift

Determines the amount (in semitones) by which the pitch of all notes is shifted.
Settings: -24semi – +24semi

Tone Generator Tune

Determines the fine tuning of the instrument’s overall sound (in 0.1 cent steps).
Settings: -102.4 – +102.3

Sustain Pedal (Foot Switch Sustain Pedal Select)

Selects the Foot switch type connected to the FOOT SWITCH [SUSTAIN] jack on the rear panel.
• When the FC3 or FC3A is used:
When you connect an optional FC3 or FC3A (equipped with the half-damper feature) for producing
the special “half-damper” effect (as on a real acoustic piano), set this parameter to “FC3A (Half on).”
If you don’t need the half-damper feature or want to disable it while still using an FC3 or FC3A, set
this parameter to “FC3A (Half off).”
• When the FC4, FC4A, or FC5 is used:
Select “FC4A/FC5.” The FC4, FC4A, and FC5 are not equipped with the half-damper feature.
Settings: FC3A (Half On), FC3A (Half Off), FC4A/FC5
NOTE Note that this setting is not necessary when controlling the half-damper feature via Control Change messages
from an external MIDI device to the instrument.

MODX Reference Manual 187

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Keyboard Octave Shift Uitlity

Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the keyboard is shifted up or down. This Settings
parameter is linked with the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons on the panel.
Sound
Settings: -3 – +3
Quick Setup
Keyboard Transpose Audio I/O
This parameter is used to transpose the current zone in units of one semitone. MIDI I/O
Settings: -11semi – +11semi
Advanced
NOTE If you transpose beyond the note range limits (C -2 – G8), notes in the adjacent octaves will be used.
System
Keyboard Velocity Curve Contents
These five curves determine how the actual velocity will be generated and transmitted according to the
Load
velocity (strength) with which you play notes on the keyboard. The graph shown in the display indicates
the velocity response curve. (The horizontal line represents the received velocity values (strength of your Store / Save
playing), while the vertical line represents the actual velocity values transmitted to the internal/external Data Utility
tone generators.) Library Import
Settings: Normal, Soft, Hard, Wide, Fixed
Normal: This linear “curve” produces one-to-one correspondence between the strength of your keyboard playing (velocity) Tempo Settings
and the actual sound change. Effect Switch
Soft: This curve provides increased response, especially for lower velocities.
Hard: This curve provides increased response, especially for higher velocities. Other Info
Wide: This curve accentuates your playing strength by producing lower velocities in response to softer playing and louder
velocities in response to harder playing. As such, you can use this setting to expand your dynamic range. Shift Function
Fixed: This setting produces the same amount of sound change (set in Keyboard Fixed Velocity below), no matter what your Legal Notices
playing strength. The velocity of the notes you play are fixed at the value set here.

Keyboard Fixed Velocity

The Fixed curve can be used to send a fixed velocity to the tone generator regardless of how hard or soft
you play the keyboard. This parameter is only available if you select the “Fixed” Keyboard Velocity Curve
above.
Settings: 1–127

Quick Setup
Using Quick Setup can instantly call up appropriate sequencer-related panel settings by selecting
convenient preset setups, allowing you to simultaneously and instantly set a variety of important
sequencer-related parameters.

[UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Quick Setup],

or
Operation [SHIFT] + [UTILITY],
or
Touch the QUICK SETUP icon

QUICK SETUP icon

MODX Reference Manual 188

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Audio Signal Flow Uitlity

Indicates the Audio signal connections. The connections will change depending on the status of the [USB Settings
TO HOST] terminal and the general settings of the instrument.
Sound
MIDI Signal Flow Quick Setup
Indicates the MIDI signal connections. The connections will change depending on the general settings of Audio I/O
the instrument.
MIDI I/O
Quick Setup Advanced
Determines the Quick Setups. System
Settings: Standalone, 1–3 Contents
The parameters for Quick Setups are as follows. Load
Store / Save
Audio Settings A/D Input Gain
Data Utility
L&R Gain
Library Import
USB L&R Gain
Tempo Settings
USB 1–8 Gain
Effect Switch
Direct Monitor Switch
Other Info
MIDI Settings MIDI In/Out
Local Control Shift Function

Arp MIDI Out Legal Notices

MIDI Sync
Clock Out
Receive/Transmit Sequencer Control
Controller Reset
FS CC Number
Super Knob CC Number
Scene CC Number
Part Output Settings Part 1–16 Output Select
A/D In Output Select
Digital In Output Select

For details about parameters related to Audio Settings, see “Audio I/O” (page 190). For details about
parameters related to MIDI Settings, see “MIDI I/O” (page 191).

The default settings for Quick Setups are as follows.

 Standalone
Use this setting when this instrument is to be used alone or as the master clock source for other
equipment.

Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out

On On Main L&R Off

 MIDI Rec on DAW

Use this setting when recording this instrument’s performance (not including Arpeggio data) to the
DAW software.

Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out

Off On Main L&R Off

 Arp Rec on DAW

Use this setting when recording this instrument’s performance including Arpeggio data to the DAW
software.

Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out

Off On Main L&R On

MODX Reference Manual 189

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 Audio Rec on DAW Uitlity

Use this setting when recording the signals from the tone generator and the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] Settings
jacks separately to DAW software, and playing the signals from the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks
Sound
directly.
Quick Setup
Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out Audio I/O
On Off Depends on the Part Off
MIDI I/O

The Output settings for Individual are as follows. Advanced

System
Part 1 Output Select Main L&R
Contents
Part 2 Output Select USB 1&2 Load
-- -- Store / Save
Part 5 Output Select USB 7&8 Data Utility
-- -- Library Import

Part 16 Output Select Main L&R Tempo Settings

Effect Switch
A/D In Output Select Main L&R
Other Info
Digital In Output Select Main L&R
Shift Function
Legal Notices
Store Current Settings
Stores the edited settings as 1–3 of “QuickSetup.”

Audio I/O
From the Audio I/O display you can set the parameters related to Audio Input and Output.

Operation [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Audio I/O]

A/D Input (A/D Input Gain)

When using the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks, this determines the input source, microphone (Mic) or
Line.
Settings: Mic, Line
Mic: Intended for low output equipment, such as a microphone.
Line: Intended for high output equipment, such as a keyboard, synthesizer, or CD player.
NOTE A guitar or bass having active pickups can be directly connected. However, when using passive pickups,
connect the instrument via an effect device.

MODX Reference Manual 190

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Main L&R (Main L&R Output Gain) Uitlity

Determines the output gain of the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Settings
Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB
Sound
USB Main (USB Main L&R Output Gain) Quick Setup
Determines the output gain of the Main L&R channel of the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Audio I/O
Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB MIDI I/O

USB 1-8 (USB 1–8 Output Gain) Advanced

Determines the output gain of 1–8 channels of the [USB TO HOST] terminal. System
Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB Contents
Load
Direct Monitor (Direct Monitor Switch)
Determines whether or not the audio signal which is output to the external device via the “Main L&R,” “USB Store / Save
Main” or “USB 1-8” channels also sounds from this instrument (Direct Monitoring). When this is set to “on,” Data Utility
the audio signal which is output via the “Main L&R,” “USB Main” or “USB 1-8” channels is also output to the Library Import
OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks and [PHONES] jack. When the external device is not connected via USB
cable, the Direct Monitor Switch is automatically turned on. Tempo Settings
Settings: Off, On Effect Switch
Other Info
Monitor Volume
Shift Function
Opens the USB Monitor setting display (page 175).
Legal Notices

MIDI I/O
From the MIDI I/O display you can set parameters related to MIDI Input and Output.
You can control the Super Knob or switch Scenes by Control Change messages.

Operation [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [MIDI I/O]

MIDI IN/OUT
Determines which physical output/input terminal(s) will be used for transmitting/receiving MIDI data.
Settings: MIDI, USB
NOTE The two types of terminals above cannot be used at the same time. Only one of them can be used to transmit/
receive MIDI data.

MIDI Thru
Determines whether the MIDI [OUT] terminal will be used as a MIDI Thru terminal or not.
Settings: Off, on

MODX Reference Manual 191

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Local Control Uitlity

This determines whether or not the tone generator of the instrument responds to your keyboard playing. Settings
Normally, this should be set to “on”—since you’ll want to hear the sound of the instrument as you play it.
Sound
Even if this is set to “off,” the data will be transmitted via MIDI. Also, the internal tone generator block will
respond to messages received via MIDI. Quick Setup
Settings: Off, On Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Arp MIDI Out (Arpeggio MIDI Out)
Determines whether to output MIDI data of Arpeggio playback or not. Advanced
Settings: Off, On System
Contents
MIDI Sync
Load
You can set various parameters related to MIDI clock and synchronization here.
Determines whether Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer/Song playback will be synchronized to the instrument’s Store / Save
internal clock, an external MIDI clock, or the Audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Data Utility
Settings: Internal, MIDI, A/D In
Library Import
Internal: Synchronization to internal clock. You can use this setting when this tone generator is to be used alone or
as the master clock source for other equipment. Tempo Settings
MIDI: Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI. Use this setting when the Effect Switch
external sequencer is to be used as master.
Other Info
A/D In: Synchronization to the tempo of the Audio signal received via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Shift Function
Clock Out Legal Notices
Determines whether MIDI clock messages will be transmitted via MIDI or not.
Settings: Off, On

Receive (Receive Sequencer Control)

Determines whether the Sequencer Control signals—start and stop of Song—will be received via MIDI or
not.
Settings: Off, On

Transmit (Transmit Sequencer Control)

Determines whether the Sequencer Control signals—start and stop of Song—will be transmitted to MIDI or
not.
Settings: Off, On

Hold/Reset (Controller Hold/Reset)

Determines the status of the controllers (Modulation Wheel, Aftertouch, Foot Controller, Breath Controller,
Knobs, etc.) when switching between Performances. When this is set to “Hold,” the controllers are kept at
the current setting. When this is set to “Reset,” the controllers are reset to the default states (below).
Settings: Hold, Reset
If you select “reset,” the controllers will be reset to the following states/positions:

Pitch Bend Center

Modulation Wheel Minimum
Aftertouch Minimum
Foot Controller Maximum
Foot Switch Off
Ribbon Controller Center
Breath Controller Maximum
Expression Maximum
Assignable Switches 1 and 2 Off
Motion Sequencer Hold Off
Each Lane of Motion Sequencer 0 (minimum) when Lane Motion Sequencer Polarity is set to “Unipolar”
64 (center) when Lane Motion Sequencer Polarity is set to “Bipolar”

FS Assign (Foot Switch Assign Control Number)

Determines the Control Change number generated by using the Foot switch connected to the FOOT
SWITCH [ASSIGNABLE] jack. Even when the instrument receives MIDI message with the same Control
Change Number specified here from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is
generated by using the Foot switch.
Settings: Off, 1–95, Arp SW, MS SW, Play/Stop, Live Set+, Live Set-, Oct Reset

MODX Reference Manual 192

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Super Knob CC (Super Knob Control Change Number) Uitlity

Determines the Control Change number generated by using the Super Knob. Even when the instrument Settings
receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here from the external
Sound
equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by using the Super Knob. When “MIDI
I/O Mode” is set to “Multi,” Channel 1 is used for transmitting MIDI data. When “MIDI I/O Mode” is set to Quick Setup
“Single,” the channel specified in “MIDI I/O Ch.” is used for transmitting MIDI data. Audio I/O
Settings: Off, 1–95
MIDI I/O
NOTE When this parameter is set to off, MIDI data is transmitted by SysEx (System Exclusive) messages.
Advanced
Scene CC (Scene Control Change Number) System
Determines the Control Change Number generated by switching Scenes. Even when the instrument Contents
receives MIDI message with the same Control Change Number specified here from the external
Load
equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by switching Scenes.
Settings: Off, 1–95 Store / Save
NOTE Scene 1–8 is selected depending on the Control Change value. Data Utility
0–15: Scene 1, 16–31: Scene 2, 32–47: Scene 3, 48–63: Scene 4, 64–79: Scene 5, 80–95: Scene 6, 96–111:
Library Import
Scene 7, 112–127: Scene 8
NOTE When the same Control Change Number is set to both of the Super Knob Control Change and the Scene Control Tempo Settings
Change, an exclamation mark (!) is shown before the value. In such a case, changes to Scene Control have Effect Switch
priority and changes to the Super Knob Control are ignored.
Other Info
Control Number Shift Function
Calls up the Control Number display in the Common/Audio Edit. Legal Notices

Advanced
From the Advanced display you can set the advanced parameters. Data communication between this
instrument and an external device using only the specified MIDI channel is also available.

Operation [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Advanced]

Zone Master (Zone Master Switch)

Determines whether the Zone function is used (on) or not (off).
Settings: Off, On

Audition Lock
Determines whether the Audition Lock is active or not. When this is set to On, the Audition function is not
available.
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 193

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

MIDI I/O Mode Uitlity

Determines which MIDI I/O mode is used for data communication between this instrument and an external Settings
device.
Sound
Settings: Multi, Single
Multi: Transmits MIDI data such as Note On/Off messages for each Part. Quick Setup
Single: Transmits MIDI data using only the channel specified in “MIDI I/O Ch.” Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
MIDI I/O Ch. (MIDI I/O channel)
Determines the MIDI channel to be used for data communication when “MIDI I/O Mode” is set to “Single.” Advanced
Settings: Ch1–16 System
When this parameter is set to “Single,” Arpeggio data is not transmitted to the external device. When the Zone Contents
function is active, the Zone setting for the Performance is given priority over the “MIDI I/O Mode” setting. You can see
which setting is active from the MIDI Signal Flow in the MIDI I/O display. Load
Store / Save
Device Number Data Utility
Determines the MIDI Device Number. This number must match the Device Number of the external MIDI
device when transmitting/receiving bulk data, parameter changes or other System Exclusive messages. Library Import
Settings: 1–16, All, Off Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Bank Select
Other Info
This switch enables or disables Bank Select messages, both in transmission and reception. When this is
set to “on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Bank Select messages. Shift Function
Settings: Off, On Legal Notices

Pgm Change (Program Change)

This switch enables or disables Program Change messages, both in transmission and reception. When
this is set to “on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Program Change messages.
Settings: Off, On

Receive Bulk
Determines whether or not Bulk Dump data can be received.
Settings: Protect (not received), On (received)

Bulk Interval
Determines the interval time of the Bulk Dump transmission when a Bulk Dump Request is received.
Settings: 0ms–900ms

Event Chase (Song Event Chase)

Event Chase allows you to specify which non-note data types are properly recognized during fast-forward
and rewind operations. Setting this to a specific event ensures the playback integrity of the event, even
when fast forwarding or rewinding.
Settings: Off, PC (Program Change), PC+PB+Ctrl (Program Change+Pitch Bend+Control Change)

Init On Boot (Initialize User Data on Boot-up)

Determines whether the User Data is initialized (On) or not (Off) when the power of the instrument is turned
on.
Settings: Off, On

Initialize Advanced Settings

Initializes the system settings edited in the Advanced display.

NOTICE
When the Initialize operation is executed, the target data and system settings you edited will be erased. Make
sure you are not overwriting any important data. Be sure to save all important data to your USB flash drive before
executing this procedure.

MODX Reference Manual 194

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Uitlity
System
Settings
From the System display you can make global system settings for the instrument. Sound
Quick Setup
Operation [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [System]
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices

MODX Firmware version

Power on Mode
Determines the start-up display (which is automatically called up when power is turned on).
Settings: Perform, Live Set

Auto Power Off

To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that
automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. This
parameter determines the amount of time that elapses before the power is automatically turned off.
Settings: Off, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120min

Initial Live Set Bank

Initial Live Set Page
Initial Live Set Slot
Selects the Live Set Bank, Page and Slot for the start-up display, for when the Power on Mode is set to
“Live Set.”
Settings: Bank: Preset, User1–User8, Library1–Library8
Page: 1–16
Slot: 1–16

Set Current Slot

Sets the currently selected Live Set Bank, Page and Slot to be displayed at startup.

Animation (Animation Switch)

Determines whether the animation of screen transition is turned on or off.
Settings: Off, On

Blur (Blur Switch)

When any display is selected, the display previously selected is blurred. This parameter determines
whether the Blur function is turned on or off.
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 195

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Beep (Beep Switch) Uitlity

Determines whether the beep sound (that confirms operations, menu/parameter selection, etc.) is turned Settings
on or off.
Sound
Settings: Off, On
Quick Setup
Knob Flash (Super Knob LED Switch) Audio I/O
Determines whether the flashing function of the Super Knob is turned on or off. MIDI I/O
Settings: Off, On
Advanced
KnobBrightness (Knob Brightness) System
Controls the brightness of the lighting of the Super Knob. Contents
Settings: 0–128
Load
Half Glow (LED Half Glow Brightness) Store / Save
Controls the dimming of the button lamps. Data Utility
Settings: Off, 1/4, 1/2 Library Import

Calibrate Touch Panel Tempo Settings

Calls up the Calibration display for the Touch Panel. Calibration of the touch panel may be necessary if the Effect Switch
touch panel does not respond correctly. Other Info
Shift Function
Initialize All Settings
Initializes all system settings you created on the Utility display. Legal Notices

Initialize User Data

Initializes User data (Performance, Motion Sequence, and Live Set) in the specified area of User memory.

Initialize All Data

Initializes all User data in the User memory and all system settings you created on the Utility display.

NOTICE
When the Initialize operation is executed, all target data and system settings you created will be erased. Make
sure you are not overwriting any important data. Be sure to save all important data to your USB flash drive before
executing this procedure.

MODX Firmware Version

Shows the version of the firmware installed on your MODX.

Live Set Font (Live Set Font Size)

Determines the font size of the contents name on the Live Set display and the Category Search display.
Settings: Normal, Large

 Live Set display

• Normal

MODX Reference Manual 196

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

• Large Uitlity

Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
 Category Search display Legal Notices
• Normal

• Large

MODX Reference Manual 197

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Uitlity
Contents
Settings
Sound
Load Quick Setup

From the Load display you can load files and data. Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Operation [UTILITY]  [Contents]  [Load]
Advanced
Parent Folder Name Current Folder Name Free Storage System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices

Folder/File select Import Option

Content Type
Among the various types of data saved in a single file on a USB flash drive or this instrument, you can load
all of them to this synthesizer at once or only a specific, desired type of data. This parameter determines
which specific type of data will be loaded from a single file. The editable parameters differ depending on
how you arrive at this display.
Settings: The file types which can be loaded as follows.

File Types Device Type Extension Description

User File File .X8U Files of the “User File” type saved to USB flash drive can be
.X7U loaded and restored to the dedicated area in the User Memory
of the instrument (page 23).
User File Type data is as follows.
• Performance
• Arpeggio
• Motion Sequence
• Curve
• Live Set
• Micro Tuning
• Waveform
• Utility settings
• Quick Setup
• Audition
Library File File .X8L Files of the “Library File” type saved to USB flash drive can be
.X7L loaded and restored to the dedicated area in the User Memory
of the instrument (page 23).
Library File Type data is as follows.
• Performance
• Arpeggio
• Motion Sequence
• Curve
• Live Set
• Micro Tuning
• Waveform
• Audition

MODX Reference Manual 198

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Uitlity
File Types Device Type Extension Description
Backup File File .X8A Data that is saved to USB flash drive as a backup file can be Settings
loaded to the User Memory again. A backup file includes all
Sound
User data, Library data, and Song data.
NOTE .X7A format (MONTAGE backup files) is not Quick Setup
supported. Audio I/O
Song&Perf Internal data A specified Song in a file that is saved to the dedicated area in MIDI I/O
the User Memory as a “Song” type can be individually
selected and loaded (played back) to the instrument. Both of Advanced
MIDI sequence and Performance data can be loaded. System
Song Internal data A specified Song in a file that is saved to the dedicated area in Contents
the User Memory as a “Song” type can be individually
selected and loaded (played back) to the instrument. Only Load
MIDI sequence data can be loaded. Store / Save
.mid File File .MID Standard MIDI File (SMF in format 0, 1) data that is saved to
Data Utility
USB flash drive can be loaded and played back.
Library Import
.wav File File .WAV Audio data (Wave File) that is saved to USB flash drive can be
loaded and played back. Tempo Settings
Audio File* File .WAV Audio data (Wave File and AIFF File) that is saved to USB flash Effect Switch
.AIF drive can be loaded and as “Waveform.”
Example: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part Other Info
selection  Element selection  [Osc/Tune]  “New Shift Function
Waveform”
Legal Notices
Motion Seq* Internal data A specified Sequence data in a file that is saved to the
dedicated area in the User Memory as an “Motion Seq” type
can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument.
Example: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part
selection  Element/Operator [Common]  [Motion Seq] 
[Lane]  “Load Sequence”

NOTE Files with an asterisk (*) are not displayed when you call up this display from the Utility display.

Parent Folder Name

Current Folder Name
Indicates the Parent Folder name and the current selected Folder Name. Once you touch the Parent Folder
Name, the Folder becomes the currently selected folder.

Free Storage
Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area.
This parameter differs depending on the Content Type.

Folder/File Select
Indicates Folders/Files in the selected Folder.

Sort (Sort Order)

Determines the Sort Order of the Files in “File Select.”
Settings: Name, Size, Date, Number
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to
big.) When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is not available for “Motion Seq,”
“Song,” and “Song&Perf” type Files.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is available only for “Motion
Seq,” “Song,” and “Song&Perf” type Files.
Number: Sorts in order of Content Number. This is available only for “Song” and “Song&Perf” type Files.

Import Option
With the MOTIF XF, MOTIF, XS, or MOXF files, you can set the file to be loaded as Performance or Voice.
Settings: Voice, Perf

Page (Page Select)

When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through
the pages.

MODX Reference Manual 199

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Job (Job Switch) Uitlity

Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this parameter is turned on, touching Settings
the File/Folder/Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.”
Sound
Touching the currently connected USB device calls up the menu to select “Format.”
Settings: Off, On Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Compatible with the MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/MONTAGE8 data Advanced
The following data can be loaded to MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 among all MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/ System
MONTAGE8 data. Note that .X7U files are loaded only as “User Files” and that .7L files are loaded only as Contents
“Library Files.”
Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file. Load
NOTE The .X7A format (MONTAGE backup files) is not supported. Store / Save
Data Utility
File Type on MONTAGE Extension on MONTAGE Contents
Library Import
User File .X7U User File
Tempo Settings
Library File .X7L Library File
Effect Switch
Other Info
Compatible with the MOTIF XF6/MOTIF XF7/MOTIF XF8 data
Shift Function
The following data can be loaded to MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 among all MOTIF XF6/MOTIF XF7/MOTIF
XF8 data. Please note that the data is loaded as “User File” or “Library File.” Legal Notices
Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file.

File Type on MOTIF XF Extension on MOTIF XF Contents

All .X3A User Voice, User Arpeggio, User Waveform
AllVoice (All Voice) .X3V User Voice, User Waveform
AllArp (All Arpeggio) .X3G User Arpeggio
AllWaveform (All Waveform) .X3W User Waveform

Compatible with the MOTIF XS6/MOTIF XS7/MOTIF XS8 data

The following data can be loaded to MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 among all MOTIF XS6/MOTIF XS7/MOTIF
XS8 data. Please note that the data is loaded as “User File” or “Library File.”
Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file.

File Type on MOTIF XS Extension on MOTIF XS Contents

All .X0A User Voice, User Arpeggio, User Waveform
AllVoice (All Voice) .X0V User Voice, User Waveform
AllArp (All Arpeggio) .X0G User Arpeggio
AllWaveform (All Waveform) .X0W User Waveform0

Compatible with the MOXF6/MOXF8 data

The following data can be loaded to MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 among all MOXF6/MOXF8 data. Please note
that the data is loaded as “User File” or “Library File.”
Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file.

File Type on MOXF Extension on MOXF Contents

All .X6A User Voice, User Arpeggio, User Waveform
AllVoice (All Voice) .X6V User Voice, User Waveform
AllArp (All Arpeggio) .X6G User Arpeggio
AllWaveform (All Waveform) .X6W User Waveform

MODX Reference Manual 200

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Uitlity
Store/Save
Settings
From the Store/Save display you can store Files and data. Sound

Press the [STORE] button Quick Setup

Operation or Audio I/O
[UTILITY]  [Contents]  [Store / Save]
MIDI I/O
Parent Folder Name Current Folder Name Free Storage Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices

File select

Content Type
You can store all data or the specified data to the instrument or USB flash drive. This parameter determines
which specific data will be stored/saved.
The editable setting value differs depending on how you arrive at this display.
Settings: The Content Types which can be stored/saved are as follows.

File Types Device Type Extension Description

Performance Internal data Data can be stored to the dedicated area in the User Memory
as a “Performance” (page 23).
User File File .X8U Data that is stored to the dedicated area in the User Memory
can be saved to USB flash drive.
Data saved as “User File” is as follows.
• Performance
• Arpeggio
• Motion Sequence
• Curve
• Live Set
• Micro Tuning
• Waveform
• Utility Settings
• Quick Setup
• Audition
Library File File .X8L Data that is stored to the dedicated area in the User Memory
can be saved to USB flash drive.
Data saved as “Library File” is as follows.
• Performance
• Arpeggio
• Motion Sequence
• Curve
• Live Set
• Micro Tuning
• Waveform
• Audition

MODX Reference Manual 201

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Uitlity
File Types Device Type Extension Description
Backup File File .X8A Data that is saved to USB flash drive as a backup file can be Settings
loaded to the User Memory again.
Sound
A backup file includes all User data, Library data, and Song
data. Quick Setup
.mid File File .MID MIDI data that is stored to the dedicated area in the User Audio I/O
Memory (page 23) can be saved as a Standard MIDI File (only
MIDI I/O
Format 0 SMF) to USB flash drive.
Motion Seq* Internal data Data can be stored as “Motion Seq” to the dedicated area in Advanced
the User Memory. System
Example: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]  [EDIT]  Part
Contents
selection  Element/Operator [Common]  [Motion Seq] 
[Lane]  “Edit Sequence” to call up “Motion Sequence Edit” Load
 “Store Sequence”
Store / Save
NOTE Files with an asterisk (*) are not displayed when you call up this display from the Utility display. Data Utility
Library Import
Parent Folder Name
Tempo Settings
Current Folder Name
Indicates the parent folder name and the current selected folder name. Once you touch the Parent Folder Effect Switch
Name, the Folder becomes the currently selected folder. Other Info
Shift Function
Free Storage
Legal Notices
Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area. This parameter differs depending
on the Content Type.

Folder/File Select
Indicates folders/files in the selected folder.

Sort (Sort Order)

Determines the sort order of the files in “File Select.”
Settings: Name, Size, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the list is arranged in descending order.
Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to
big.) When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is not available for
“Performance” and “Motion Seq” type files.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is available only for
“Performance” and “Motion Seq” type files.

Page (Page Select)

When files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through
the pages.

Job (Job Switch)

Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this parameter is turned on, touching
the File/Folder/Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.”
Touching the currently connected USB device calls up the menu to select “Format.”
Also you can create a new folder when storing a file.
Settings: Off, On

MODX Reference Manual 202

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Uitlity
Data Utility
Settings
From the Data Utility display you can control Files and data in the User Memory. Also, you can collectively Sound
delete multiple contents such as Performances in the User Memory.
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
Operation [UTILITY]  [Contents]  [Data Utility]
MIDI I/O
 Folder List Advanced
Current Folder Name System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices

Folder select
Current Folder Name
Indicates the Current Folder Name.

Job (Job Switch)

Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off). This parameter is available only for the
“Waveform” folder on this display. When the parameter is turned on, touching “Waveform” folder calls
up the menu to select “Optimize.” When this function is active, you can select multiple contents
collectively from this display.
Settings: Off, On

Folder Select
Indicates the Content Types in the User Memory as folders. Touching the Folder opens it.
• Arp (Arpeggio)
• Library
• Live Set
• Motion Seq
• Performance
• Song
• Waveform

Page (Page Select)

When folders in “Folder Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to
scroll through the pages.

MODX Reference Manual 203

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 When the selected Folder is opened Uitlity

When this function is active, you can select multiple contents collectively from this display. Settings
Parent Folder Name Current Folder Name Free Storage Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices

File Select
Parent Folder Name
Current Folder Name
Indicates the parent folder name and the current selected folder name. Touching the parent folder name
returns to the folder list view.

Free Storage
Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area. This parameter differs depending
on the Content Type. This parameter is displayed only when “Job” is set to OFF.

File Select
Indicates Files in the selected Folder. The Job function is always available in this display. Touching the File/
Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.” (“Rename” is not available for
the Files in “Library” type Folder.)

Sort (Sort Order)

Determines the Sort Order of the Files in “File Select.”
Settings: Name, Size, Date, Number
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to
large). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is available only for “Library”
type Contents.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is not available for “Arp” and
“Library” type Contents.
Number: Sorts in order of Content Number. This is available only for “Arp,” “Song,” and “Waveform” type Contents.

Select All
Selects all contents in the folder. This button is displayed only when no content is selected.

Unselect All
Unselects all contents in the folder. This button is displayed only when any of contents is selected.

Delete
Deletes the selected content(s). This button is displayed only when any of contents is selected.

MODX Reference Manual 204

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Page (Page Select) Uitlity

When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through Settings
the pages.
Sound
Quick Setup
Library Import Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
You can select a desired Performance in the Library file which is loaded to the User Memory and copy the
Advanced
Performance to the User Bank.
System
Operation [UTILITY]  [Contents]  [Library Import] Contents
Load
 Library Folder List Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices

Library Folder Select

Library Folder Select

Indicates the Libraries as folders. Touching the Folder opens it. These folders are displayed only when
Library files are loaded in the Load display.

MODX Reference Manual 205

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 When the selected Library Folder is opened Uitlity

Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
Performance Select

Performance Select
Indicates the Performances in the selected Library. Touching the name switches between being selected
or unselected.

Select All
Selects all Performances in the selected Library folder. This button is displayed only when no Performance
is selected.

Unselect All
Unselects all Performances in the Library folder. This button is displayed only when any of Performances is
selected.

Import to User Bank

Copies the selected Performance in the User Bank. User Waveforms and User Arpeggio which are used in
the selected Performance are copied to the User Bank as well. This button is displayed only when any of
the Performances is selected.

MODX Reference Manual 206

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Uitlity
Tempo Settings
Settings
From the Tempo Settings display you can set parameters related to Tempo and Synchronization. Sound
Quick Setup
[UTILITY]  [Tempo Settings]
Audio I/O
or
Operation [SHIFT] + [ENTER] MIDI I/O
or
Advanced
Touch the TEMPO SETTING icon
System
TEMPO SETTING icon Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices

Tempo
Determines the Performance tempo. This parameter is not available when the “MIDI Sync” is set to “MIDI”
or “A/D In” and the instrument is synchronized to an external device (“EX. Tempo” is displayed instead of
the setting value.)
Settings: 5–300

Knob Flash (Super Knob LED Switch)

Determines whether the flashing of the Super Knob is turned on or off.
Settings: Off, On

Global Tempo (Global Tempo Switch)

When this switch is set to OFF, the tempo setting changes when a different Performance is selected. When
this switch is set to ON, the current tempo is used for all Performances.
Settings: Off, On

Tap Tempo
Allows you to tap the desired tempo by touching this parameter or by moving the cursor to this parameter
and pressing (tapping) the [ENTER] button on the panel.
This parameter is not displayed when the “MIDI Sync” is set to “MIDI” and the instrument is synchronized
to an external device.
NOTE When “MIDI Sync” is set to “A/D In,” the tempo search starts by touching this parameter.

MODX Reference Manual 207

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

MIDI Sync Uitlity

Determines parameters related to MIDI clock and synchronization. Settings
Determines whether Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer/Song playback will be synchronized to the instrument’s
Sound
internal clock, an external MIDI clock, or the Audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Settings: Internal, MIDI, A/D In Quick Setup
Internal: Synchronization to internal clock. You can use this setting when this tone generator is to be used alone or Audio I/O
as the master clock source for other equipment.
MIDI I/O
MIDI: Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI. Use this setting when the
external sequencer is to be used as master. Advanced
A/D In: Synchronization to the tempo of the Audio signal received via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. System

Clock Out Contents

Determines whether MIDI clock messages will be transmitted or not. Load
Settings: Off, On Store / Save
Data Utility
Mode (Click Mode)
Determines the click sound (metronome) that is used during recording or playback. Library Import
Settings: Off, Rec, Rec/Play, Always Tempo Settings
Off: The click will not sound. Effect Switch
Rec: The click will sound during Song recording only.
Other Info
Rec/Play: The click will sound during Song recording and playback.
Always: The click will always sound.
Shift Function
Legal Notices
Precount (Click Pre-count)
Determines the number of count-in measures provided before recording actually starts after pressing the
[R] (Play) button while the Song recording.
Settings: Off (Recording starts as soon as the [R] (Play) button is pressed), 1meas–8meas
NOTE Since the click sound is created with the internal tone generator, using click playback affects the overall
polyphony of the instrument.

Volume (Click Volume)

Determines the click sound volume.
Settings: 0–127

Beat (Click Beat)

Determines which beats the metronome click will sound.
Settings: 1/16 (16th notes), 1/8 (8th notes), 1/4 (quarter notes), 1/2 (half notes), Whole (whole notes)

Type (Click Type)

Determines the click sound type.
Settings: 1–10

Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)

Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the
Arpeggio of multiple Parts is played back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you
trigger it. The displayed number indicates the resolution in clocks.
Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)

Click Out (Click Output Select)

Determines the specified output for the “Click.”
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

MODX Reference Manual 208

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Uitlity
Effect Switch
Settings
From the Effect Switch display you can make Effect Bypass settings. None of the settings made on this Sound
display will be stored. When the instrument is restarted, the parameter values are also initialized. Quick Setup
Audio I/O
[UTILITY]  [Effect Switch]
Operation or MIDI I/O
Touch the EFFECT icon Advanced
System
EFFECT icon
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices

Insertion FX (Insertion Effect Switch)

Determines whether the Insertion Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On

System FX (System Effect Switch)

Determines whether the System Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On

Master FX (Master Effect Switch)

Determines whether the Master Effect is active or not. This parameter is automatically switched off when
Global A/D is ON, and switched on when Global A/D is OFF. Set this switch manually when needed.
Settings: Off, On

Master EQ Switch
Determines whether the Master EQ is active or not. This parameter is automatically switched OFF when
Global A/D is set to ON, and switched ON when Global A/D is set to OFF. Set this switch manually when
needed.
The Master EQ Switch settings are not stored.
Settings: Off, On

Arp Bypass (Arpeggio Bypass Switch)

Determines whether the Arpeggio Bypass is active or not. When this is set to on, all Arpeggiator operations
are disabled.
Settings: Off, On
NOTE Arpeggio Bypass can also be turned on/off by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and using the
[ARP ON/OFF] button. The [ARP ON/OFF] button flashes when Arpeggio Bypass is turned on.
NOTE When the Part Arpeggio Switch setting is changed, Arpeggio Bypass is automatically turned off even if it has
been set to on.
NOTE You can edit arpeggios in Song data generated by the arpeggiator with using DAW software. By turning
Arpeggio Bypass on, you can prevent Song data edited on the DAW software from being affected again by the
arpeggiator when routed back to the MODX.

MODX Reference Manual 209

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Kbd Ctrl Lock (Keyboard Control Lock) Uitlity

Determines whether Keyboard Control Lock is active or not. When this is set to on, the Keyboard Control is Settings
turned on only for Part 1 and off for the other Parts.
Sound
When this is set to off, Keyboard Control settings for all Parts are returned to the original status.
Settings: Off, On Quick Setup
NOTE When you use the MODX as a 16-part multi-timbral sound module with DAW software, the Keyboard Control Audio I/O
Lock function is useful for creating or editing MIDI tracks one by one.
MIDI I/O
Global A/D Advanced
Determines whether the volume for the A/D Part changes when you switch the Performances. System
When this parameter is ON, the volume for the A/D Part stays the same, and other parameters related to Contents
the A/D Part do not change. When set to OFF, the volume changes according to the volume set in each
Performance, and other parameters related to the A/D Part change accordingly. Load
The Global A/D settings are not stored. Store / Save
Settings: Off, On Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices

MODX Reference Manual 210

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Uitlity
Other Info
Settings
Shows other information. Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
Shift Function
MIDI I/O
Shows the Shift Function List. Advanced
System
Contents
Legal Notices
Load
Shows legal notices such as the GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE. Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices

MODX Reference Manual 211

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Live Set
Live Set
Live Set
Live Set is a list in which Performances can be freely arranged. Up to 16 Performances can be selected Edit
from the Preset Live Sets and arranged over a single page—making it easy to call up and play your
favorite Performances. For basic instructions on Live Set, see the Owner’s Manual. Register

Live Set
From the Live Set display you can call up the registered Performances.

Press the [LIVE SET] button,

Operation or
Touch the LIVE SET icon

Performance List LIVE SET icon

Current Slot Name Performance Attribute

Current Performance Name

Bank (Live Set Bank Select)

Determines the Live Set Bank.
Settings: Preset, User 1–8 (default), Library Name (when the Library file is read)

Page (Live Set Page Select)

Determines the Live Set Page.
Settings: Live Set page 1–16 (default)

Performance List
Indicates the Performances registered in the selected Live Set.

Category Search
Calls up the Performance Category Search display (page 176).

Current Performance Name

Indicates the selected Performance Name registered in the selected slot.

Current Slot Name

Indicates the selected Slot Name.

Performance Attribute
Indicates the Performance Attribute registered in the selected Slot.

MODX Reference Manual 212

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Live Set
Live Set Edit (Edit)
From the Live Set Edit display you can edit the Live Sets (User Bank only). Live Set
Edit
Operation [LIVE SET]  User Bank selection  [EDIT] Register

 When the Slot to which a Performance has been registered is selected

Performance List

Bank (Live Set Bank Name)

Enters the desired name for the selected Live Set Bank. The names can contain up to 20 characters.
Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.

Page (Live Set Page Name)

Enters the desired name of the selected Live Set Page. The names can contain up to 20 characters.
Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.

Done
Touching this parameter finishes the Live Set Editing and returns to the Live Set display.

Performance List
Indicates the Performances registered in the selected Live Set.

Delete
Deletes the Performance from the selected Slot.

Slot Name
Enters the desired name of the selected Slot. The names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the
parameter calls up the input character display.

Performance (Performance Name)

Indicates the Performance Name in the selected Slot.

Color
Determines the Color of the selected Slot.
Settings: Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Blue, Azure, Pink, Orange, Purple, Sakura, Cream, Lime, Aqua, Beige, Mint, Lilac

Volume
Determines the volume of the Performance in the selected Slot.

MODX Reference Manual 213

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Swap (Swap Switch) Live Set

Determines whether the Swap function is turned on or off. You can switch settings between Slots. For Live Set
instructions on the Swap function, see the Owner’s Manual.
Edit
Settings: Off, On
Register
Copy (Copy Switch)
Determines whether the Copy function is turned on or off. You can copy the setting to another Slot.
Settings: Off, On

 When an empty Slot is selected

MODX Reference Manual 214

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

 Copying or Exchanging Live Sets Live Set

Live Set
You can copy (or exchange) between Live Sets on a Bank or page basis.
Edit
NOTE Page copy (or exchange) between different Banks cannot be executed.
Register
Operation [LIVE SET]  User Bank selection  [EDIT]  Select Bank/Page to be copied  [SHIFT] + [EDIT]

1 3

2 4

Copy
Touching this button activates the Bank/Page Copy function.

Exchange
Touching this button activates the Bank/Page Exchange function.

1 Bank to be copied (or exchanged)

NOTE The currently selected Part is set automatically and this setting cannot be changed.

2 Page to be copied (or exchanged)

3 Copy (or exchange) destination Bank

4 Copy (or exchange) destination Page

MODX Reference Manual 215

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

Live Set
Live Set Register (Register)
From the Live Set Register display you can register Performances to the Live Set. For basic instructions on Live Set
Live Set Registering, see the Owner’s Manual. Edit
Register
Operation [SHIFT] + [LIVE SET] (from any operation displays, other than Live Set)

Slot Select

Bank (Live Set Bank Select)

Determines the Live Set Bank for registering Performances. Preset Bank and Library Bank cannot be
selected for this parameter.
Settings: User 1–8 (default)

Page (Live Set Page Select)

Determines the Live Set Page for registering Performances.
Settings: Live Set Page 1–16 (default)

Slot Select
Determines the Slot for registering Performance. When the Slot containing the Performance is selected
and press the [ENTER] button (or touch the Slot again on the display), the Performance in the slot is
replaced with the currently selected Performance.
Settings: Slot 1–16

MODX Reference Manual 216

Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection
Connecting an iPhone or iPad
NOTE In order to eliminate the risk of noise from other communication when using this instrument with an iPad or
iPhone app, be sure to turn on Airplane Mode and then turn on Wi-Fi.
NOTICE
Be sure to place your iPad or iPhone on a stable surface to prevent it from falling over and being damaged.

Apps compatible with the MODX provide many more convenient, enjoyable ways to use this musical
instrument.
For details on how to connect the devices, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual,” which is
available from the Yamaha web site.
NOTE For audio signal transfer, refer to the connection using Lightning to USB Camera Adapter.

Details of compatible smart devices and apps can be found on the following page from the Yamaha web
site.
http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/

Manual Development Department

© 2018 Yamaha Corporation
Published 03/2018 MW-A0

MODX Reference Manual 217